JP2019154607A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can increase game interest.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a movable body 400 capable of executing a specific operation; movable body performance executing means capable of executing a movable body performance that operates the movable body 400 from a first timing of a specific variable display when executing a specific variable display by a specific variable display pattern of a plurality of variable display patterns; and specific performance executing means capable of executing a specific performance different from the movable body performance. The movable body performance executing means can execute the movable body performance from a second timing different from the first timing when the specific performance is executed in the variable display immediately before the specific variable display. Even when an item corresponding to a song A is executed, the item corresponding to the song A can be displayed by "Back". When an item corresponding to a song B different from the song A is selected, the song B is replayed from the beginning, and the item corresponding to the song A is selected again, the song A is played as it is.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 26

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of performing a variable display.

  Some conventional gaming machines include a movable body capable of executing a specific operation, and the movable body operates at the start of variable display (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-134812 A

  However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the game entertainment cannot be improved because the timing for operating the movable body is constant regardless of the effect of the variable display immediately before the movable body is operated.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming interest.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a gaming machine according to means 1 of the present invention provides:
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A movable body (for example, movable accessory 400) capable of executing a specific operation (for example, movement between the retreat position and the effect position);
When executing a specific variable display by a specific variable display pattern (for example, a super reach variation pattern including a special reach variation pattern) among a plurality of variable display patterns, the first timing of the specific variable display (for example, a variable display pattern) Movable body effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes effect symbol variation start processing and effect symbol variation changing processing) capable of executing a movable object effect for operating the movable object from the timing 1 second after the start) When,
A specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes a countdown notice effect process) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a countdown notice effect) different from the movable body effect;
With
When the specific effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the specific variable display, the movable body effect execution means starts from a second timing different from the first timing (for example, the start timing of the variable display). The movable body effect can be executed,
further,
Display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player (for example, an effect control microcomputer 90200 for displaying items corresponding to a plurality of types of music as shown in FIG. 60). When,
Selection effect means (execution control microcomputer 90200 for changing an item selected by a selection operation, as shown in FIG. 60) capable of executing a selection effect for selecting any one of the plurality of items,
Corresponding effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the item selected by the selected effect means (an effect control microcomputer for outputting music and video corresponding to the selected item as shown in FIG. 60) 90200 etc.)
The display means can display an item corresponding to the first effect even when the first effect of the plurality of types of effects is being executed in the selected effect (for example, FIG. ), The item corresponding to the music A can be displayed as “return” even if the item corresponding to the music A is being executed),
The corresponding effect execution means is
When the item corresponding to the second effect different from the first effect is selected while the first effect is being executed, the second effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 60 (h)). As shown, when the item corresponding to the music B different from the music A is selected, the music B is reproduced from the beginning),
When the item corresponding to the first effect is selected again in a state where the first effect is being executed, the state of the first effect being executed is taken over (for example, FIG. 60 ( As shown in g), when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the music A is played as it is)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the start timing of the movable body effect can be varied depending on whether or not the specific effect is being executed in the immediately preceding variable display, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, even when the selected effect is selected again, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine described in means 1,
The second timing is characterized in that it is closer to the start timing of the specific variable display than the first timing (for example, the start timing of variable display).
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the relevance between the specific effect and the movable object effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

A gaming machine according to means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 2,
The first timing is a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start timing of the specific variable display (for example, a timing one second after the start of variable display),
The second timing is a start timing of the specific variable display (for example, a start timing of variable display).
According to this feature, the player can more easily recognize the relationship between the specific effect and the movable object effect, and the player can easily recognize that the first timing is different from the second timing. So, you can improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 3,
Hold storage means (for example, a start winning reception command buffer 194A) capable of storing information relating to variable display as hold storage information;
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a variation pattern setting process);
A determination means for determining a variable display pattern before the variable display pattern determination means determines the variable display corresponding to the stored storage information (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process);
With
The specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect in a variable display immediately before the variable display corresponding to the hold storage information to be determined by the determination means based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, The part for performing the countdown notice effect by executing the effect symbol variation start process and the effect symbol variation process after the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the countdown notice effect in the prefetch notice effect determination process),
The specific effect is a countdown effect that gradually suggests a remaining period until the specific variable display.
According to this feature, the player can be expected to perform the specific variable display, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 4,
Hold storage means (for example, a start winning reception command buffer 194A) capable of storing information relating to variable display as hold storage information;
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a variation pattern setting process);
A determination means for determining a variable display pattern before the variable display pattern determination means determines the variable display corresponding to the stored storage information (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process);
With
The specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect in a variable display immediately before the variable display corresponding to the hold storage information to be determined by the determination means based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, The part for performing the countdown notice effect by executing the effect symbol variation start process and the effect symbol variation process after the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the countdown notice effect in the prefetch notice effect determination process),
The specific effects include a first specific effect (for example, a chance eye notice effect) and a second specific effect (for example, a countdown notice effect) different from the first specific effect,
The movable body effect execution means includes:
When the first specific effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the specific variable display, the movable body effect is executed from the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the special reach variation is performed). When the chance eye notice effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display of the pattern, the operation of the movable accessory 400 is started from the timing one second after the start of the variation display in the variation display of the special reach variation pattern. ,
When the second specific effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the specific variable display, the movable body effect is executed from the second timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, the special reach fluctuation is performed). When the countdown notice effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display of the pattern, the operation of the movable accessory 400 is started from the variation display start timing in the variation display of the special reach variation pattern)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the timing of starting the movable body effect can be varied depending on whether the first specific effect is executed or the second specific effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the specific variable display. , Can improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 5,
Advantageous state control means (for example, CPU 103 pre-hit for big hit release, big hit release) that controls to an advantageous state (for example, big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the variable display result becomes a specific display result (for example, big hit) Middle processing, post-hit release post-processing, and jackpot end processing)
When the specific variable display is executed, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the non-specific variable display is executed (for example, fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern of super reach α and super reach β including special reach). The display is a part where the big hit expectation is higher than the fluctuation display in the normal reach and non-reach fluctuation patterns),
The specific variable display pattern includes a first specific variable display pattern (for example, a special reach variation pattern) that executes the movable body effect during the specific variable display, and a first that does not execute the movable body effect during the specific variable display. 2 specific variable display patterns (for example, a variation pattern of super reach α and super reach β).
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the movable body effect is executed during variable display, so that it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 6,
When the movable body effect is executed from the second timing and when the movable body effect is executed from the first timing, the timing to end the movable body effect is the same (for example, as shown in FIG. 26). In addition, when the operation of the movable accessory 400 is started from the start timing of the variable display and when the operation of the movable accessory 400 is started from the timing one second after the start of the variable display, both the start of the variable display is 6 seconds. (The part that ends the operation of the movable accessory 400 at a later timing)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the process after the end of the movable body effect can be shared between the case where the movable body effect is executed at the first timing and the case where the movable body effect is executed at the second timing. The associated processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 7,
Drive means (for example, an accessory drive motor 411) for operating the movable body;
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body by the driving means (eg, CPU 120 for effect control);
With
The movable body is provided so as to be operable between an origin position (for example, a retracted position) and a position away from the origin position (for example, an effect position)
The control means includes
First operation control for positioning the movable body at the origin position (for example, a portion that performs non-detection operation control or detection operation control in Modification 1), and the movable body can operate normally. 2nd motion control (for example, the part which performs motion control for real motion check in modification 1) for confirming this, and 3rd motion control for performing the above-mentioned movable body production (for example, movable in the example) The part 400 for moving the accessory 400 from the retracted position toward the effect position in the variation display of the special reach variation pattern).
In the second operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate within a range of a first speed and a second speed that is faster than the first speed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is used for confirming the actual operation). When performing motion control, control is performed so that the movable accessory operates at a speed within the range of the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed that is faster than the minimum speed. Part),
In the first operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the first speed in the second operation control (for example, when the production control CPU 120 is not detecting as the first operation control). When performing motion control or motion control during detection, at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the motion control for actual operation confirmation as the second motion control (in this embodiment, the same speed as the minimum speed in the motion control for actual motion confirmation). The part that controls the movable object to operate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the first operation control, the movable body operates at a speed that can be stopped at any timing, and thus can be safely positioned at the origin position.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the following means 9-16. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a player can select one of a plurality of types of demonstration effects as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-32534, and a selection operation is detected during the demonstration effects. Then, when the demo image is scroll-displayed, there is one that switches to the music corresponding to the displayed demo effect. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the selection operation is performed in a state where the demonstration effect has already been selected and the state before the selection is returned to the previous state, the music corresponding to the demonstration effect is repeated at the beginning. There was a risk that the interest would be reduced. In view of this point, provision of a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in gaming interest is desired.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the means 9 according to another aspect is a gaming machine that performs a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901),
Display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player (for example, an effect control microcomputer 90200 for displaying items corresponding to a plurality of types of music as shown in FIG. 60). When,
Selection effect means (execution control microcomputer 90200 for changing an item selected by a selection operation, as shown in FIG. 60) capable of executing a selection effect for selecting any one of the plurality of items,
Corresponding effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the item selected by the selected effect means (an effect control microcomputer for outputting music and video corresponding to the selected item as shown in FIG. 60) 90200 etc.)
The display means can display an item corresponding to the first effect even when the first effect of the plurality of types of effects is being executed in the selected effect (for example, FIG. ), The item corresponding to the music A can be displayed as “return” even if the item corresponding to the music A is being executed),
The corresponding effect execution means is
When the item corresponding to the second effect different from the first effect is selected while the first effect is being executed, the second effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 60 (h)). As shown, when the item corresponding to the music B different from the music A is selected, the music B is reproduced from the beginning),
When the item corresponding to the first effect is selected again in a state where the first effect is being executed, the state of the first effect being executed is taken over (for example, FIG. 60 ( As shown in g), when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the music A is played as it is).

  According to such a configuration, even when the selected effect is selected again, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine described in means 9 above,
It further includes state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90560) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state) advantageous to the player,
The selection effect means can execute at least the selection effect during the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 60, the selection effect for selecting an item can be executed during the big hit state).

  According to such a configuration, even if the selected effect is selected again, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game during the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 11 is the gaming machine described in means 10 above,
The selection effect is a first selection effect that is executed regardless of the player's operation at the start of the advantageous state (for example, a round that is executed regardless of the player's operation at the start of the big hit, as shown in FIG. 60 (a)). A selection effect at the start) and a second selection effect executed based on the player's operation after the first selection effect (for example, as shown in FIG. A selection effect or the like executed based on the operation).

  According to such a configuration, since there are a plurality of execution timings of the selection effects in the advantageous state, the selection effects can be executed according to the player's preference.

The gaming machine of means 12 is the gaming machine described in means 11 above,
The period during which the second selection effect can be performed is longer than the first selection effect (as shown in FIG. 60, the first selection effect at the start of the round is from the start of the first round to the end of the second round. The second selection effect at the start of the third round is set from the start of the third round to the final round, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to deal with various types of players by lengthening the executable period of the second selection effect executed based on the player's operation.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is the gaming machine described in the means 11 or means 12, and
The corresponding effect execution means is
As the plurality of kinds of effects, music can be reproduced (as shown in FIG. 60, music can be reproduced, etc.)
In the first selection effect, when the item is changed based on the player's operation, the music to be played is changed in accordance with the change of the item (for example, as shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B). In addition, in the selection effect at the start of the round, when the item is changed based on the player's operation, the music to be played is changed in accordance with the change of the item),
In the second selection effect, even if the item is changed based on the player's operation, the music to be played is not changed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 60 (e) and 60 (f), 3 In the selection effect at the start of the round, even if the item is changed based on the player's operation, the reproduced music does not change).

  According to such a structure, since music is not frequently switched, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 11 to means 13, wherein
In the second selection effect, the display means displays an item corresponding to the currently executed effect in a different mode from the display of the item when the first selection effect is being executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 60 (e), in the selection effect at the start of the third round, the display of the item corresponding to the currently executed music is “return” which is different from the display of “A” in the selection effect at the start of the round. Display etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily indicate to the player which effect is currently being performed.

The gaming machine of means 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 11 to means 14, wherein
Hold storage means (for example, the RAM 9055 of the game control microcomputer 90560) for storing information related to the variable display as hold information (for example, hold storage, etc.);
Determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90560 or the like) capable of determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled after execution of the variable display corresponding to the hold information before the execution of the variable display corresponding to the hold information. When,
In the advantageous state, when the holding information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is stored in the holding storage unit based on the determination result of the determining unit, the advantageous state is controlled. A notification effect means (for example, an effect control microcomputer 90200) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a reserved continuous effect, etc.) to be notified in advance;
The notification production means is
The notification effect can be executed at any one of a plurality of timings during the advantageous state (for example, the hold continuous effect can be executed at any of a plurality of timings during the round),
As one timing among the plurality of timings, the notification effect can be executed at a timing when the player selects any one of the plurality of items in the first selection effect (for example, a plurality of timings). As one of the timings, it is possible to execute the hold continuous effect at the timing when any one of the plurality of items at the start of the round is selected).

  According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised in the first selection effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the second selection effect, the notification effect may be executed at the timing when the player selects any one of the plurality of items.

The gaming machine of the means 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 13 to 15, wherein
The corresponding effect execution means reproduces a specific part that is a part of the music being selected at the time of the selection effect and is different from the head of the music (for example, reproduces a chorus part, etc.)
The display means can select a selectable image (for example, the selectable music image 9096 of FIG. 62) that can specify a selectable music (for example, the first to third music of FIG. 62) and still not selectable. 62 can be displayed together with a non-selectable image (for example, the non-selectable music image 9097 of FIG. 62, etc.) that can specify a specific music (for example, the fourth to sixth music of FIG. 62) (for example, FIG. 62 (A) and the like.

  According to such a structure, the production effect at the time of music selection can be improved.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot classification determination table, (B) is a figure which shows the contents of various jackpots. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data storage area for effect control, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of the determination ratio in S245. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a countdown notice effect process. (A) is a timing chart in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α, and (B) is a timing chart in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β. (A) is a timing chart in the special reach fluctuation pattern when the countdown notice effect is not executed due to the previous change, and (B) is the special reach change pattern when the countdown notice effect is executed according to the previous change. It is a timing chart. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the production | presentation display apparatus in the fluctuation pattern of special reach in the case of countdown notice effect non-execution by the last change. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the production | presentation display apparatus in the variation pattern of a special reach in the case of countdown notice effect execution by the last change. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the production | presentation display apparatus in the variation pattern of a special reach in the case of countdown notice effect execution by the last change. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the production | presentation display apparatus in the fluctuation pattern of a special reach in the case of execution of a chance eye notice effect by the last change. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the production | presentation display apparatus in the fluctuation pattern of a special reach in the case of execution of a chance eye notice effect by the last change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of operation control at the time of non-detection in the modification, operation control at the time of detection, and operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation speed example of the operation control at the time of non-detection in the modification, the operation control at the time of detection, and the operation control for real operation confirmation. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball apparatus with which a pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball apparatus with which a pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball apparatus with which a pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the open pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is an effect drawing which shows the effect performed during a big hit. It is an effect drawing which shows the effect performed during a rush. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit related process. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a rush. It is a timing chart which shows the process in the big hit in the modification. It is an effect drawing which shows the effect performed during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit time music selection process. It is a figure which shows the example of a music selection control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a music selection process.

  A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the following description, the front side of FIG. 1 will be described as the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be described as the rear (back) side. In addition, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is an opposing surface that faces the player when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player side. In the description of each step in the flowchart according to the present embodiment, for example, a portion indicated as “step S1” may be abbreviated as “S1”.

  FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as a gaming machine) is roughly divided into a gaming board 2 (gauge board) that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame 3 (base frame) that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. ). The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B is composed of, for example, a 7 segment LED or a dot matrix LED (light emitting diode) and the like. A special symbol (also referred to as “special”), which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, is variably displayed (also referred to as variable display or variable display). For example, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". . In the present embodiment, the special symbol is exemplified as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of characters, symbols, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this. The design may be a combination of a plurality of dot displays that does not have a certain rule and is difficult to identify or cannot be identified.

  Both the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are formed in a square shape, for example. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, both a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”). May be different.

  An effect display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The effect display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5, the first special symbol display by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display by the second special symbol display 4B in the special game are respectively displayed. In the effect symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display units such as three, for example, the effect symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variation display of the effect symbol is also included in the variation display game.

  As an example, in the display area of the effect display device 5, “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. And, in response to the start of any one of the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 4B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, changes in the effect symbols (also referred to as decorative symbols) (for example, vertical scroll display) are started. Thereafter, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special symbol game, the effect display devices 5L, 5C, and 5R in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the finalized design symbol (final stop symbol) that is the result of variation display of the production symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the effect display device 5, a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display 4A or a special graphic using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display 4B. In synchronism with the game, a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified are displayed in a variable manner, and a definite effect symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols are derived and displayed by stopping display of identification information such as effect symbols (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) and ending the variable display. . On the other hand, during the variation display from the start of the variation display of the production symbol to the display of the definite production symbol that is the variation display result, the variation rate of the production symbol becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not deterministically displayed, the player can recognize that the variation of the effect symbol due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include a complete stop display of the effect symbol for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  For example, eight kinds of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters) are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It may be any combination of numbers, English letters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. Character images may be, for example, people, animals, other objects, or , A decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or other arbitrary figure). A corresponding symbol number is attached to each of the effect symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. The production symbols are not limited to eight types, and any number may be used as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a combination of “big hit” and a combination of “out of” can be configured (for example, seven types or 9 types).

  From the start of the variation display of the effect symbols, until the finalized effect symbol that is the variation display result is derived and displayed, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R , For example, a scroll display is performed in which the symbol number flows from top to bottom sequentially from the smallest to the largest, and when the effect symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, The effect symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” effect symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol number. When the effect symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the effect symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  On two left and right positions below the display area of the effect display device 5, there are set storage storage display areas 5D. In the hold memory display area 5D, a hold memory display for displaying a variable display hold memory number (a special figure hold memory number) corresponding to a special game is displayed.

  Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). In other words, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the effect symbol is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done. In the present embodiment, the stored storage display generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening is a round white display, and the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening ( The reserved storage display generated on the basis of the start winning due to the entry) is similarly a round white display.

  In the following description, the hold storage display area 5D may be referred to as a hold display area, and the number of hold memories can be recognized by the number of hold storage displays displayed in the hold storage display area 5D. Further, a display in which the hold storage display is gathered may be referred to as a hold display.

  The hold display in the hold storage display area 5D is generated based on a start winning by passing (entering) the game ball through the first start winning opening, or the game ball passes (entering through the second starting winning opening). ), The display mode (for example, display color and shape) may be varied depending on whether the start is based on the winning prize. In this embodiment, “execution” and “execution” are synonymous.

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, the first hold for displaying the number of special figure hold memories in an identifiable manner on the upper and lower parts of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B together with the hold storage display area. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of memory in which the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure hold memory number is the number of memories in which the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display holding memory number obtained by adding the first special figure holding memory number and the second special figure holding memory number is also referred to as a total holding memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbol variation display is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In the case of performing the effect using the effect display device 5 in this way, for example, In recent years, there has been a diversification of production styles, such as production where the contents of the production, including variable display, disappear for a moment from the screen, or production where the movable object blocks all or part of the screen. ing. For this reason, even if the display area on the effect display device 5 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, for the purpose of eliminating the difficulty of recognizing whether or not the current variation display state is present, the fourth symbol after the effect symbol, the special symbol, and the normal symbol is displayed on the effect display device 5. A 4 symbol display area may be provided. These 4 symbols are displayed in a 4th symbol for the first special symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and for the second special symbol in synchronization with the variation in the second special symbol. It is only necessary to display the variation of the fourth symbol. Note that the 4th symbol is always displayed in a variable manner with a constant operation, and is not disappeared from the screen or shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  A movable accessory 400 is provided above the effect display device 5. The movable accessory 400 is driven by an accessory driving motor 411 (see FIG. 2) connected to the effect control board 12, and a retracted position above the effect display device 5 and an effect position in front of the effect display device 5. It is possible to move up and down.

  Below the effect display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a second starting prize opening is formed as a starting region (second starting region).

  As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, when a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory is in an off state, a regulation member (not shown) advances, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening. It is normally open. On the other hand, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the on state, the regulating member (not shown) is retracted, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. Easy to open and open. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 "), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 "), the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided above the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Accordingly, when the special winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special winning hole, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball into the special prize winning port. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variable display) so that it can be variably displayed. Such a normal symbol variation display is referred to as a general game (also referred to as a “normal game”).

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect LED 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, the game ball paid out as a prize ball or the game ball paid out by lending is held (stored) so as to be supplied to the hitting ball launcher. A dish (a hit ball supply dish) is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and an LED control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuation of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 is performed. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and produces the effect display device 5 and the movable accessory 400. In addition, various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering such as the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect LED 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 includes all or part of the display operation in the effect display device 5, the operation of the movable accessory 400, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting / extinguishing operation in the game effect LED 9 and the like. Alternatively, a function of determining a control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as a part, is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The LED control board 14 is a control board for LED output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, the game effect LED 9 and the like are turned on / off. An LED driver circuit or the like is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. Further, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display 4A, a second special symbol display 4B, a normal symbol display 20, a first hold indicator 25A, a second hold indicator 25B, and a general figure hold indicator 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is constituted by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the command 8001H is a first change start command that specifies the start of change in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B. Command 81XXH is an effect that is displayed in a varying manner in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the special symbol change display in the special game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variation display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates a variation display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result (predetermined result) whether the variable display result is “out of” or “big hit”, and the variable display result is “big hit”. The different EXT data is set in accordance with the determination result (the jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types of jackpot types in the case of "".

  In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variation display result is “out”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable big hit A”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable big hit B”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable variable big hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the stop (decision) of the variation of the effect symbols in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time shortening control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is performed by the time shortening control. On the other hand, a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, short time state) in which probability variation control is not performed is used. In addition, the command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (high probability low base state, timeless probability variation state) in which probability variation control is performed while time variation control is not performed, and command 9503H is probability variation and time variation control. It is assumed that the fourth gaming state designation command corresponds to the gaming state in which the control is performed together (highly accurate high base state, time-varying probability changing state).

  The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening being notified command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the big winning opening is opened to notify that the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a jackpot end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  In the jackpot start designation command or jackpot end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result designation command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type decision result. . Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command or jackpot end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. The first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A is established. The command B200H indicates that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. Based on this, the second start opening prize designation command is used to notify that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory count notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory count. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved memory number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type (probability variation, non-probability variation or sudden probability) as the determination result at the time of winning. The command C6XXH determines whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a variation pattern of “non-reach”, “super-reach”, “special reach”, or “other” as the determination result at the time of winning. This is a variable category command indicating the result.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 101 (Read Only Memory 101) for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM 102 (Random Access Memory 102) that provides an area, a CPU 103 (Central Processing Unit 103) that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103 It comprises a random number circuit 104 that performs and an I / O 105 (Input / Outputport 105).

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern, The numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for display result determination is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR4 may be counted.

  The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random value used for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the fluctuation display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65536”. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is used to determine the big hit type as “probable big hit A”, “probable big hit B”, or “non-probable” when the variation display result is “big hit”. It is a random value and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, for example.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol or the effect symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” to “ It takes a value in the range of “997”.

  The random value MR4 for determining the normal map display result is used to determine whether the fluctuation display result in the normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per normal map” or “displaced from the normal map”. For example, it takes a value in the range of “3” to “13”.

  FIG. 5 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is “out of”, the variation display mode of the production symbol is “non-reach” and “reach”. Corresponding to the case where the result is “big hit”, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach variation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach out of variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the deviation fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “out of”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  For the big hit fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern, the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach of normal reach is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed, and the super reach β There is a special reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect is executed but the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β. In this embodiment, only one type of the normal reach variation pattern and the special reach variation pattern is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal reach α, normal reach β, As described above, a plurality of variation patterns may be provided as a normal reach variation pattern or a special reach variation pattern. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach α and super reach β that are the super reach fluctuation patterns. . In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which super reach reach production such as super reach α and super reach β in this embodiment is performed, the variation pattern in which super reach β super reach production is performed. However, the special figure variation time is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach production of the super reach α is executed. In addition, the special reach variation pattern in the present embodiment is a variation pattern in which the reach production of the super reach β is executed. It is set longer than the normal reach fluctuation pattern.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the variation display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation degree is set higher. Therefore, the normal reach change pattern and the super reach change are set. In the pattern, the greater the variation time, the higher the expectation of jackpot. In the present embodiment, as an exception, the special reach fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than the super reach β fluctuation pattern has the highest jackpot expectation.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, these variation patterns are classified into variation pattern types such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, special reach type, and the like. Is not determined from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, but only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the variation pattern type is provided. The variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after first determining the variation pattern type from the random value for determining the variation pattern type It may be determined variation pattern et executed.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and setting tables prepared in advance for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern as shown in FIG. Table data constituting a variation pattern table to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure is not limited thereto. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the second special figure.

  The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the fluctuation display result as “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table.

  In the display result determination table of the present embodiment, the special figure display result depends on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short time state (low accuracy state), or a probability variation state (high accuracy state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the determination random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “out of place”.

  In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result as to whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as the big hit gaming state. It is data for determination to be assigned. In the display result determination table of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state), more judgment values than the normal state or the short time state (low probability state) are “big hit”. It is assigned to the special map display result. As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as the “big hit” in the normal state or the short time state (low probability state) to control the big hit gaming state. Then, compared to the probability determined (about 1/300 in the present embodiment), the probability of determining to control the big hit gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit” is higher (about 1/30 in the present embodiment). ). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variation state (high probability state), there is a probability that it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state as compared to the normal state or the short time state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state so as to increase.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table of the present embodiment, when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”, one of a plurality of jackpot types is selected based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol on which the variation display (variation) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol) Depending on whether it is a special game by the symbol display 4B), the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change big hit A”, “probability big hit B” Are assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types.

  Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 7B. In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, high-accuracy control and time-shortening control are executed after the jackpot gaming state is finished. The probability variation big hit A and the probability variation big hit B that shift to the accurate base state, and the non-probable big hit that shifts to the low accuracy high base state by executing only the time-shortening control after the big hit gaming state is set.

  In the big hit gaming state with “probable big hit A” and the big hit gaming state with “non-probable big hit”, as described above, there are 16 rounds of changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player (so-called 16 rounds), which is a recurring normally open jackpot. On the other hand, in the big hit gaming state with “probable big hit B”, as described above, the round in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated five times (so-called five rounds). It is a short-term open jackpot. Thus, “probability variation big hit A” may be referred to as 16 rounds (16R) probability variation big hit, and “probability variation big hit B” may be referred to as five rounds (5R) probability variation big hit.

  The high-accuracy control and the time-shortening control executed after the end of the big hit gaming state of the probability changing big hit A and the probability changing big hit B are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that has occurred again is the probable big hit A or the probable big hit B, the high-precision control and the short-time control are executed again after the big hit gaming state ends, so the big hit gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive resort state that occurs continuously.

  On the other hand, the time-shortening control that is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state due to “non-probable big hit” is that a special number game is executed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times) or the predetermined number of special figure games is executed. The game is ended by being in a big hit gaming state before is executed.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 7A, depending on whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure or the second special figure, the big hit of “probable big hit A” and “probable big hit B” Assignment of judgment value to type is different. That is, when the variation special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of “81” to “100”) are assigned to the big hit type of “probability big hit B” with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special chart, the determination value is not assigned to the big hit type of “probability big hit B”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 4A is satisfied. And a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 4B is satisfied. Thus, the ratio of determining the big hit type as “probable big hit B” with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, the big hit type is “probable big hit B” and it is not determined to control the short-term open big hit state with a small number of rounds. In the gaming state where the game ball is likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent short-term open big hit states with few prize balls obtained. Can be prevented.

  In the example of setting the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 7A, whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart is assigned to the judgment value for the “non-probable variation” jackpot type. Regardless of whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the probability of being a non-probable big hit and the probability of being a probable big hit are the same. ing.

  Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the judgment value to “probability variation big hit B” differs depending on whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure or the second special figure, and “probability big hit A” The allocation of the judgment value to "" differs depending on whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure or the second special figure, and for "probability big hit A" with a large number of rounds, the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure. It is set so that it is easier to determine the case of the case than the case of the first special drawing.

  Even when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a predetermined range of judgment values different from those when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure are assigned to the big hit type of “probability big hit B”. May be. For example, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than the case where the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure may be assigned to the big hit type of “probability big hit B”. Alternatively, regardless of whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined with reference to the common table data.

  The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern is selected from among the above-described plural types according to the predetermined determination result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the special figure display result is “big hit”, and the special figure display result is “out”. The deviation variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance is prepared in advance.

  In the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern per normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern per big super reach α (PB1-2), the fluctuation pattern per super reach β big hit (PB1-3), and the special reach big hit For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-4), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. In the present embodiment, when these determination values are the jackpot type “probability big hit A” or “probability big hit B”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “non-probable big hit”. When the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it is not “probable big hit A” or “probable big hit B” when the super reach β variation pattern is executed. It can raise the player's expectation.

  Further, the deviation variation pattern determination table is used when the number of reserved storage patterns is 1 or less, and when the total number of reserved storage is 2 to 4 is used. Outlier variation pattern determination table B, outlier variation pattern determination table C used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8, and when the gaming state is a high base state in which time-shortening control is performed A deviation variation pattern determination table D used for the above is prepared in advance.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table A, the non-reach variation variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, the normal reach variation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α variation variation pattern (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to the fluctuation pattern determining random pattern MR3 for the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) and the special reach shifting pattern (PA2-4). ing. Further, in the deviation variation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A random pattern MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be used for the variation pattern of the reach α (PA2-2), the variation pattern of the superreach β variation (PA2-3), and the variation pattern of the special reach deviation (PA2-4). A predetermined random value in the range is assigned as a determination value. Further, in the deviation variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and super A random pattern MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be used for the variation pattern of the reach α (PA2-2), the variation pattern of the superreach β variation (PA2-3), and the variation pattern of the special reach deviation (PA2-4). A predetermined random value in the range is assigned as a determination value. Further, in the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α variation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control. (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of super-reach β deviation, and fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of special reach deviation. A numerical value is assigned as a judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the non-reach shift variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-shortening non-reach shift variation pattern (PA1-1). The non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time than -2). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach deviation variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. When the start prize is won, it becomes difficult to generate useless start prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and there is no non-reach fluctuation By determining the pattern (PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed by increasing the time for the variable display.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least the game state, that is, data corresponding to the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a special figure storage unit 151A, a universal diagram storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, a game control timer setting unit 153, and a game control counter setting unit. 154 and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

  The special figure holding storage unit 151A has a start prize (first start prize) that has been passed (entered) through the first start prize opening formed by the normal prize ball apparatus 6A, but has not yet started. A game ball (a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A) or a game ball passes (enters) through a second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B (start winning prize ( On-hold data of a special game (a special game using the second special game in the second special symbol display 4B) that has been started but has not started yet is stored. As an example, the special figure holding storage unit 151A associates with a holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the starting winning opening, numerical data indicating the starting opening buffer value corresponding to the winning starting winning opening, A random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, a random value MR2 for jackpot type determination, a variation pattern determination random number value extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball Until the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 is reserved data, and the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, a total of 8 first special figure reserved memories and 4 second special figure reserved memories). Remember. The hold data stored in the special figure holding storage unit 151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game is being held, and whether or not a big hit is made based on the fluctuation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. Hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not.

  In this embodiment, the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage are stored in the same special figure reservation storage unit 151A. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage may be stored in separate special figure reservation storage units. As described above, when storing the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory in the individual special figure hold storage units, respectively, the variable display based on the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory are used. One of the change display based on the priority display may be executed with priority over the other, or the change display based on the first special figure hold storage and the change display based on the second special figure hold storage may be executed simultaneously.

  The general-purpose holding storage unit 151C stores the holding information of the general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure hold storage unit 151C associates with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passing gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that the software 103 can be updated by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, random number values that are not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number which updates the numerical data which shows the random value independently of RAM122 which performs, the display control part 123 which performs the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the production | presentation display apparatus 5, and CPU120 for production control A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the effect display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating LED data is connected to the LED control board 14.

  Note that, on the side of the effect control board 12, as with the main board 11, for example, random values (also referred to as effect random numbers) for determining various types of effects such as a notice effect are set.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations and settings, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. Yes.

  As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the effect display device 5, the movable accessory 400, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect LED 9 and the decoration LED, the effect model, etc.). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns used for control is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control pattern table only needs to store, for example, an effect control pattern during special figure change, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns.

  The special-control variation production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special-sign game until the finalized special symbol that is the special-sign display result is derived and displayed. It consists of data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations, such as effect display operations in effect symbol variation display operation, reach effect, re-lottery effect, etc., or various effect display operations not accompanied by effect symbol variation display Has been. The notice effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed in response to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the special-figure variation production control pattern, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns with different production modes in each reach production may be included for each variation pattern that executes the reach production.

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 9A as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 9A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated in accordance with an effect operation state such as an effect image display state on the screen of the effect display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the effect display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 9B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The received command buffer 194A at the time of starting winning is stored in a storage area (buffer numbers “1” to “1”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “8”) of the total reserved memory number of the first special figure reserved memory and the second special figure reserved memory. 8) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “0”) corresponding to the special figure during the variable display. When there is a starting prize at the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening, a starting opening prize designation command (first starting slot prize designation command or second starting slot prize designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation Four commands, a command and a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold memory in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of the start winning prize include a start opening prize designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category designation command, A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure reserved memory and the second special figure reserved memory is secured in association with the reserved memory number notification command.

  The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one by one as will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the display of the change in the highest-order hold storage (buffer number “1”) is started. At the same time, the stored content of the buffer number “0” for storing the content of the pending storage satisfying the start condition is cleared in the effect symbol variation stop process executed when the variation display is terminated. ing.

  Further, in the start winning reception command buffer 194A of the present embodiment, whether or not the pre-reading notice effect (countdown effect or chance eye effect) is determined in the pre-reading notice effect determination process (FIG. 20) described later and the look-ahead. A storage area for a countdown effect target flag and a chance eye effect target flag indicating the effect type when the target is determined to be a notice effect is reserved for each storage area (entry).

  In the present embodiment, “0” is stored in the countdown effect target flag if the countdown effect target flag is not determined in the pre-reading notice effect determination process described later, and countdown is performed if the countdown effect target flag is determined. “1” is stored in the effect target flag. In addition, in the pre-reading notice effect determination process to be described later, if it is not determined as a chance eye effect target, “0” is stored in the chance eye effect target flag, the chance eye effect target is determined, and the effect type is the first. When it is determined to be the first chance effect, “1” is stored in the chance target effect flag, and when the chance type effect is determined and the effect type is determined to be the second chance effect, “2” is stored in the effect target flag.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry of the start winning reception command buffer 194A at the time of starting winning. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning designation command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if a command is received, the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, the pending storage number notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the end numbers “1” to “8” of the buffer number. It will be stored in order.

  The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 9B is the entry (buffer number “ The entry stored in the entry “0”) is deleted, and the entry stored in the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to the buffer number “1”) and the start The stored contents of the entries after the pending display of the variable display to be shifted are shifted. For example, when the variable display is completed in the storage state shown in FIG. 9B, each command stored in the buffer number “0” is deleted, and each command stored in the buffer number “1” is stored in the buffer. In addition to being shifted to the number “0”, each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”, and the buffer numbers “3” and “4” , “5”, “6”, “7”, “8”, the commands stored in the areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, The region is shifted to a region corresponding to “6” and “7”. Therefore, the buffer number “0” is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol display 20 executes a normal symbol variation display such that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2. For example, the normal symbol display unit 20 is activated based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the normal symbol variation display, such as the end of the previous general symbol game, is satisfied after the normal symbol start condition is satisfied. The usual game is started.

  In this ordinary game, after a normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time which is a normal symbol change time elapses, a fixed normal symbol which is a normal symbol change display result is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (symbol per symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed normal symbol, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol becomes “per symbol”. On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is “out of normal”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variation display result of the normal symbol is “per normal”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended, the special figure game by the first special symbol display 4A is started. Further, the second starting condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit gaming state, the special game by the second special symbol display 4B is started.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol indicator 4B, after the special symbol variation display is started, when the variation display time as the special symbol variation time elapses, the special symbol variation display is performed. The resulting definite special symbol (special diagram display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, “ Out of place ". In addition, a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. When the predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) as a result of the predetermined display is stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to control to the small hit game state as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  After the fluctuation display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is the off symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a loss symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A may be different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display 4B. However, a special symbol common to both of the special symbol games may be a big hit symbol or an off symbol.

  After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol in the special game, and the specific display result is “big hit”, in the big hit gaming state, the big prize winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 has a predetermined upper limit time. The big prize opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize-winning ball device that receives a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the big prize-winning slot, with the grand prize-winning door that has opened the grand prize-winning port during the round. 7 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round that is the opening cycle of the big prize opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “16”, etc.). Even before the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a big prize opening). .

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” that are the big hit symbols, the special symbol indicating the number “7” is a big hit symbol corresponding to the probability variation big hit A, which will be described later, A special symbol indicating a number is a jackpot symbol corresponding to a probability variation jackpot B described later. In the big hit game state (normally open big hit state) that is controlled after the big hit symbol of “3” or “7” is derived as the final special symbol in the special figure game, the big prize opening door of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is A special variable prize is awarded by opening the big prize opening in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winning balls are generated. A round of changing the ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed a first number of times (for example, 16 times). The normal open big hit state is also referred to as a first specific gaming state.

  Of the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is a jackpot symbol corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot described later, and is a special variable. The grand prize opening door of the winning ball apparatus 7 is used for a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. By setting the open state, the round in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state (open state) that is advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed the first number of times (for example, 16 times) as with the probability change big hit A. .

  Control is performed after a special symbol indicating the number “5” is derived from among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols as the confirmed special symbols in the special symbol game. In the big hit gaming state (short-term open big hit state), the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in each round (the period in which the big winning opening is opened by the big winning opening door) The upper limit) is the same as the predetermined period in the normal open big hit state, but the round in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is the first number in the normal open big hit state ( For example, it is repeatedly executed a second number of times (for example, 5 times) less than 16 times. The short-term open big hit state is also referred to as a second specific gaming state. In addition, in these short-term open big hit states, the number of rounds is exemplified as the second number of 5 times, but the round number is the same as the first number (for example, 16 times) in the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in each round after a predetermined number (for example, 6) (the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened by the big winning opening door) ) May be set to a second period (for example, 0.1 second) shorter than the first period in the normal open big hit state, so that the substantial number of rounds may be made smaller than that in the normal open big hit state.

  In such a short-term open big hit state, the number of rounds is smaller than that in the normal open big hit state. In addition, in these short-term open big hit states, it is practically impossible to get a ball (prize ball) by setting the open period of the big prize opening to the second period (such as 0.1 second) for all rounds. It is good also as a big hit game state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state, the period during which the game ball is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is different from the first period in the normal opening round specific gaming state. The second period is shorter and the second round number is less than the first round number in the normal open round specific game state. It is only necessary that the number of winning balls (prize balls) that can be acquired is less than the big hit state.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the effect display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A and In response to the start of any one of the special figure games using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B, the variation display of the effect symbols is started. The period from the start of the variation display of the effect symbols to the end of the variation display due to the stop display of the confirmed effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R Then, the variation display state of the effect symbol may be a predetermined reach state.

  Here, the reach state refers to an effect design (“reach variation design”) that has not been stopped yet when the effect design that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the design symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R, etc.) in advance. The remaining effect symbol display area (for example, “medium” effect) that has not been stopped yet when the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol indicating the alphanumeric character of “7”) constituting the determined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the presentation symbols are changing, or in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R This is a display state that changes synchronously while constituting all or part of the combination.

  In response to the reach state, the variation speed of the effect symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person) different from the effect symbol is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5. Or change the display mode of the background image, play and display a moving image that is different from the production symbol, or change the variation mode of the production symbol, so that the production operation different from before reaching the reach state is executed May be. Such an effect operation such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the change mode of the effect pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). Note that the reach effect includes not only the display operation in the effect display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect LED 9, etc. before reaching the reach state. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the operation mode.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variation display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed.

  As an example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, and special reach are set in advance. When the reach form of super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, and special reach appears, there is a possibility that the fluctuation display result will be “big hit” compared to the case where the reach form of normal reach appears. Expectation level) is higher. Further, in the present embodiment, in the reach form of super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, and special reach, when super reach β appears, the display result of fluctuation is larger than when super reach α appears. The big hit expectation degree that is “big hit” is high, and when the special reach appears, the big hit expectation degree that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” is higher than when the super reach β appears (big hit expectation degree: special reach> Super reach β> Super reach α> Normal reach).

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the reach, except for the special reach, the variation time is set such that super reach β> super reach α> normal reach (see FIG. 5), and the variation time is long. Indeed, the expectation level for jackpots is higher.

  During the variation display of the production symbol, unlike the reach production, there is a possibility that the variation display state of the production symbol will be the reach state, the variation display result may be a `` big hit '', etc. A variable display effect such as “slip” or “pseudo-run” may be executed to notify the player in accordance with a variable display mode of the effect symbol. It is only necessary to determine whether or not these “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” variation display effects should be executed in response to the variation pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. Whether or not the “slip” variation display effect is to be executed on the effect control board 12 side may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the main board 11 side.

  During the variation display of the production symbol, unlike the variation display production such as the reach production, for example, a predetermined production image is displayed, an image display that is a message, voice output, LED lighting, etc. Due to the presentation operation different from the fluctuation display operation, the fluctuation display state of the production symbol may be in the reach state, the reach production by the super reach may be executed, and the fluctuation display result is “big hit” There is a case where a notice effect for informing the player in advance that there is a possibility of becoming a warning is executed. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the change display state of the effect symbol after the effect symbol display is started in all of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. May be executed (started) before the reach state is reached (before the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R). Further, the notice effect that informs that there is a possibility that the variation display result may be a “hit” may include one that is executed after the variation display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state.

  When the special symbol that becomes the outlier symbol is stopped (derived) as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variation symbol display state of the effect symbol does not reach the reach state after the effect symbol variation display is started. In addition, a definite effect symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display mode of the effect design is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) variable display mode when the variation display result is “out of”.

  When a special symbol that becomes an outlier symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variation display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state after the effect symbol variation display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a definite effect symbol that is a predetermined out-of-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach disengagement”) when the variation display result is “out of”.

  Corresponding to the fact that the variation display state of the production symbol has reached the reach state when the jackpot symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as a special symbol that is a jackpot symbol as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game Then, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a definite effect symbol that is a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as “non-probable variable big hit combination”) among a plurality of types of big hit combinations is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the non-probable big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol without the reach effect being executed.

  The confirmed effect symbol which is a normal big hit combination (non-probable variation big hit combination) is variably displayed in, for example, the “left”, “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the effect display device 5. Among the effect symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, any one of the effect symbols having the even symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the effect display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “middle” and “right”. The effect symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”).

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the finalized symbol of the normal jackpot combination (non-probable variable jackpot combination) is stopped and displayed. The variable display mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. It should be noted that the normal jackpot combination (non-probable variation jackpot combination) may be stopped and displayed as the confirmed effect symbol without executing the reach effect. Based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” for the big hit type of “non-probable change”, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time reduction control, the special symbol change display time (special figure change time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. In the short-time control, so-called electric chew support is performed in which the winning frequency of the normal symbol is increased and the winning frequency of the normal variable winning ball device 6B is increased as described later. Here, the normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, after the power is turned on) The same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed is performed. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is established first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big hit gaming state ends, and the fluctuation display result is “big hit”. Sometimes it just needs to end.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, out of the special symbol that becomes the big hit symbol, when the probability variable big hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the variation display state of the production symbol is the reach state. Correspondingly, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” is executed, the definite effect symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination among a plurality of types of jackpot combinations May be stopped. It should be noted that the probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as the confirmed effect symbol without the reach effect being executed. The confirmed effect symbol that is a probable big hit combination is, for example, a symbol number “1” that is variably displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 5. Among the effect symbols of “8”, the effect symbol whose symbol number is “7” is a predetermined effective line in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed all together. The effect symbol having the symbol number “7” constituting the probability variation jackpot combination is referred to as a probability variation symbol. When the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the effect symbol.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, among the special symbols that become short-term open round jackpot symbols, when the probability variation jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, the change display state of the production symbol is Corresponding to the reach state, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” is executed, the predetermined probable big hit combination is selected from a plurality of types of big hit combinations. The confirmed effect design may be stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as the confirmed effect symbol without the reach effect being executed. The confirmed effect symbol that is a probable big hit combination is, for example, a symbol number “1” that is variably displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 5. ~ Among the effect symbols of “8”, any one of the effect symbols having the odd number “1”, “3”, “5” other than the symbol number “7” is “left”, “middle”, “right” As long as it is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect symbols having the symbol numbers “1”, “3”, and “5” constituting the probability variation jackpot combination are referred to as probability variation symbols in the same manner as the effect symbol “7” described above. In addition, when the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the effect symbol. Good.

  Regardless of whether the confirmed effect symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a promiscuous jackpot combination, the variation display mode in which the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game will have a "big hit" variation display result. This is referred to as a variation display mode of “probability variation” (also referred to as “big hit type”). In this embodiment, among the big hit types of “probable change”, the control is set to the normally open big hit state based on the fact that “7 big” is displayed as the confirmed special symbol and the result is “big hit”. After that, probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed together with time reduction control. On the other hand, among the big hit types of “probable change”, it is controlled to the short-open big hit state based on the fact that “5 big” is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, and the short-term open big hit state is controlled. At the same time, probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed.

  By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the fluctuation display result (special display result) becomes “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than that in the normal state. The probability variation control may be ended when the condition that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state again after the big hit gaming state is ended. Similar to the time reduction control, the probability variation control is ended when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times the same as the time reduction number or 90 times different from the time reduction number) are executed after the end of the big hit gaming state. May be. In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good.

  When the time-shortening control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control to improve the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control (electricity support control) that is advantageous to the player by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied is performed. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. In this embodiment, the gaming state to be controlled is not set, but the probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the time-shortening control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. In addition, only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to distinguish from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of time-shortening control and probability variation control is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the probability that the special-figure game can be executed frequently and the fluctuation display result in each special-figure game will be “big hit” As a result, the player is in an advantageous state. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  The re-lottery effect may be executed during the variation display of the effect symbol in which the confirmed effect symbol is a non-probable variation jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the effect symbols that are normally a big hit combination are temporarily displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the effect display device 5, for example, “left ”,“ Middle ”,“ right ”effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, with the same effect symbols in the same state, are changed again, and the effect symbol (probability variable symbol) that is a probabilistic big hit combination and the normal big hit One of the effect symbols (normal symbols) to be combined is stopped and displayed as a final effect symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes the normal jackpot combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped effect symbol It is only necessary to perform a re-lottery selection effect for deriving and displaying. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, after the re-variation of the temporarily stopped display effect symbol, the definite effect that becomes the probable big hit combination A re-lottery winning effect that stops and displays a symbol may be executed, or a re-lottery winning effect may be executed.

  After a definitive effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination (non-probable variation jackpot combination) is derived and displayed, at the start of the jackpot gaming state or during the execution of a round in the jackpot gaming state, one of the rounds ends in the jackpot gaming state Probability of whether or not to control to the probabilistic state in the period from the start of the next round to the start of the next round, the period from the end of the last round in the jackpot game state to the start of the next variable display game, etc. A promotion effect during the big hit may be executed as a notification effect. A notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”.

  The jackpot promotion effect includes a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion in which the game state becomes a probable change state despite the fact that the confirmed effect symbol is a normal jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5, and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the effect symbol variation display is performed. May be notified so that the player can recognize the presence or absence of promotion to be in a certain change state by displaying different effect images.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, the process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (S12). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer arranged outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (S13). ).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are possible. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits the control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S17). As an example of these, in the command control processing, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. An effect control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table by setting the state to the off state. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S15 shown in FIG. 10 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning process (S21). After executing the start winning process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of S22 to S29 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

  In the start winning process of S21, as shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 first uses the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (S101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (S101; Y), the first special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is “4”) (S102). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of first special figure reservation storage is not the upper limit value in S102 (S102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (S103) .

  When the first start port switch 22A is OFF in S101 (S101; N), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in S102 (S102; Y), the normally variable winning ball apparatus Whether or not the second start port switch 22B is ON is determined based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by 6B (S104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (S104; Y), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is “4”) (S105). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding memory number is not the upper limit value in S105 (S105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” (S106). .

  After executing one of the processes of S103 and S106, the total pending memory count value that is the stored value of the total pending memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is updated so as to add 1 ( S108)

  After executing the process of S108, the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and determining the jackpot type from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (S109). The numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as the hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit together with the start port buffer value (S110).

  The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type indicate whether or not the fluctuation display result of the special symbol or the production symbol is “big hit”, and further the fluctuation display result. This is used to determine the type of jackpot when “hit”. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol and the effect symbol. The CPU 103 executes the process of S109 to extract numerical data indicating all of the random values used for the determination of the variation display mode including the variation display result and the variation display time of the special symbol and the effect symbol.

  Subsequent to the processing of S110, transmission setting of a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (S111). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening prize designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. Is done.

  Following the process of S111, a winning random number determination process is executed (S112). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (S113). The reserved memory count notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 10 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is done.

  After executing the processing of S113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is “1” (S114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “1” (Y in S114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to “0” (S115), and the process proceeds to S104. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2” (N in S114), the starting port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to “0” (S116), and the start winning process is performed. finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect an effective winning of a game ball at the same time, it is possible to reliably complete the processing based on the detection of both effective starting winnings.

  FIG. 13A is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S112 of FIG. 12 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when the variation display of the special symbol or the effect symbol is started, the special symbol display result (the variation display result of the special symbol) is obtained by a special symbol normal process (S22 of FIG. 11, FIG. 14) described later. It is determined whether or not the game state is controlled as a big hit game state. Further, in a variation pattern setting process (S23 in FIG. 11, FIG. 15), which will be described later, determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variation display mode of the effect symbol is performed. On the other hand, separately from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination processing in S112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). Thus, it is determined whether or not it is determined to derive and display the jackpot symbol as the special symbol display result, whether or not the variation display mode of the effect symbol is a predetermined display mode with super reach, and the like. Thus, before the variation display of the special symbol or the production symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, when it is determined whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variation display. Before, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or which category the fluctuation display mode of the production symbol is the fluctuation display mode. Based on this judgment result, the CPU 120 for production control, etc. As will be described later, the hold display notice effect is executed.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 13 (A), the CPU 103 first checks the state of a time-short flag or a probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, for example, to check the pachinko gaming machine 1 The current gaming state at is identified (S121). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

  Following the processing of S121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 6 is selected and set (S122). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted in S109 of FIG. 12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (S123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the display result determination table selected by the process of S122 are set, and the CPU 103 stores the random value MR1 and each determination value. It suffices to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by performing the comparison one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be “big hit”.

  When it is determined in S123 that it is not within the big hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the big hit is not made during the variable display (S123; N), the symbol corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “out of range”. The transmission setting of the designated command is executed (S124), and it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time reduction state (S125). When the time reduction flag is not set (S125; N), the deviation variation pattern determination table A is selected and set. When the time reduction flag is set (S125; Y), the deviation variation pattern determination table is selected. D is selected and set (S127).

  The deviation variation pattern determination table A is a variation pattern determination table for deviation that is used when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less. Further, the deviation variation pattern determination table D is a variation pattern determination table for deviation used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, the variation pattern determination table for deviation used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4. B and a deviation variation pattern determination table C to be used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. Out of C, in the variation pattern determination table A for non-reach, a value from 0 to A is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. In the pattern determination tables B and C, a value exceeding 0 to A in the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the non-reach variation pattern. It is allocated. On the other hand, in the deviation variation pattern determination tables A to C, values from B to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern in the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

  For this reason, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation variation pattern determination table A in S126, the determination of non-reach and super reach can be made regardless of whether the number of pending storage changes after the determination. Since it becomes a variation pattern, the determination at the time of starting winning is made by using the variation pattern determination table A for deviation.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (A), when it is determined in S123 that it is within the big hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the big hit is made during the variable display (S123; Y), it is for the big hit type determination. The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 (S128). At this time, the CPU 103 responds according to the fluctuation special figure corresponding to the start port buffer value ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2"). The big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined whether the jackpot type is determined as a plurality of types.

  Also, the symbol designation command transmission setting corresponding to the jackpot type determined in S128 is executed (S129), and the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected as a table for determining any one of the jackpot variation patterns. Set (S130).

  After executing any of the processes of S126, S127, and S130, using the variation pattern determination table set in the processes of S126, S127, and S130 and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for the variation pattern determination, A variation category corresponding to a range of determination values including the random number MR3 is determined (S131). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13B, at least when the fluctuation display result is “out of”, the fluctuation category that becomes the fluctuation display mode of “non-reach” in common regardless of the total number of reserved storage. , A variation category that is a variation display mode of “super reach”, a variation category that is a variation display mode of “special reach”, and a variation display mode other than these “non-reach”, “super reach”, and “special reach” It is only necessary to provide an “other” variation category (for example, normal reach) and determine whether or not the variation category is determined based on the random value MR3.

  Thereafter, after setting for transmitting a variation category designation command corresponding to the determination result in the process of S131 to the effect control board 12 (S132), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  The special symbol normal process of S22 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B based on the presence / absence of the reserved data stored in the special symbol storage unit 151A A determination is made whether or not. In the special symbol normal process, whether the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, Make a decision (predetermined) before being displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the special symbol variation display result in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol or the like in the special symbol game by the first special symbol indicator 4A or the second special symbol indicator 4B). Any one of the off symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process of S23 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is selected from any of a plurality of variations using numerical data indicating a variation pattern determination random value MR3 based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variation display result is “big hit”. This includes the process of determining whether or not. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special diagram process flag is updated to “2”.

  By the special symbol normal processing of S22 and the variation pattern setting processing of S23, the variation pattern including the variation display time of the confirmed special symbol, the special symbol, and the effect symbol, which becomes the variation display result of the special symbol, is determined. That is, the special symbol normal process and the variation pattern setting process use the special symbol and the effect symbol by using the random value MR1 for determining the special diagram display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. The process which determines the fluctuation | variation display mode of is included.

  The special symbol variation process of S24 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation processing includes processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of S24 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is decremented or incremented by 1, Regardless of whether it is a special game using the first special graphic in the special symbol display 4A or a special graphic game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display 4B, it is passed by a common timer. Time measurements are taken. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of S24 is performed in the special symbol variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 4B. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process of S25 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display unit 4A or the second special symbol display unit 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the definite special symbol that is the variation display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on. When the jackpot flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. Is done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing of S26 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, etc. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is opened is set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “non-probable big hit A”, “probable big hit A”, or “probable big hit B”. May be. As an example, regardless of the type of jackpot, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the opening number of the big winning opening, which is the upper limit number of times to execute the round, is ”Or“ probability big hit A ”, it is only necessary to set the normal open big hit state by setting“ 16 times ”. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is “probable big hit B”, the number of times of opening the big winning opening, which is the upper limit number of rounds, is set to “5”, thereby setting the short-term open big hit state. It's fine. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release process of S27 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in S28 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end processing of S29 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect LED 9 And a process for performing various settings (setting of a probability change flag and a time reduction flag) for starting the probability change control and the time reduction control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  In the big hit ending process, the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read, and the big hit type is any of “non-probable big hit A”, “probable big hit A”, and “probable big hit B”. Identify what happened. If it is determined that the identified big hit type is not “non-probable variation big hit”, setting for starting the probability variation control (setting of the probability variation flag) is performed.

  In addition, when the specified big hit type is “non-probable variable big hit”, the setting for starting the time reduction control (in advance corresponding to the setting of the time reduction flag and the upper limit value of the special game that can be executed during the time reduction control). A predetermined count initial value (“100” in the present embodiment) is set in the short-time counter.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S22 of FIG. 11 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the total number of reserved memories is “0” (S141). For example, in the process of S141, the value of the total pending storage number counter stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the total number of special figure hold storage is other than “0” in S141 (S141; N), the special figure is stored as the hold data corresponding to the hold number “1” in the special figure hold storage unit 151A. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for display result determination, the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination are read (S142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of S142, the value of the total reserved storage number counter is updated by 1 and the data in the special figure reservation storage unit 151A is updated. Specifically, the special figure reservation storage unit 151A indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “8”). Data is shifted up by one entry (S143).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start port buffer of the holding number “1” read in S143 is “1” (S144). When the value of the start port buffer of the hold number “1” read in S143 is “1” (S144; Y), “1” indicating that the value of the variation special figure designation buffer is the fluctuation of the first special figure. ”Is set (S145), and the value of the start port buffer of the holding number“ 1 ”read in S143 is“ 2 ”(S144; N), the value of the second special figure is set to the value of the variable special figure designation buffer. “2” indicating the fluctuation is set (S146).

  After the execution of S145 or S146, in S149, the display shown in FIG. 6 is used as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the special symbol fluctuation display result, is “big hit” or “off”. Select and set the result judgment table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of “big hit” or “out of line”. Then, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “out of line” (S150). In S150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state in which the probability variation flag is set, if the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, “big hit” If it is not applicable, it is determined as “out of”. Also, if the probability variation flag is not set, if the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined as “big hit”, and if not, it is determined as “out of place”. Is determined.

  Thus, in the special figure display result determination table selected in S149, different determination values corresponding to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time are assigned to “big hit”. In this process, the special figure display result is determined as “big hit” using different judgment data (judgment values) depending on whether or not the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a high probability state. In the case where the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined as a “big hit” with a higher probability than in the case where the gaming state is a low probability state.

  After the special figure display result is determined in S150, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (S151). If it is determined that the game is a “hit” (S151; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (S152). At this time, the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 7A is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (S153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer for variation, and “non-probability change” and “probability change A” in the jackpot type determination table. Then, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of “probability variation B” matches, which of the jackpot types is a plurality of types is determined (S154).

  By determining the jackpot type in the process of S154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is any one of the gaming state of the short-time state and the probability variation state that is more advantageous to the player than the short-time state. Whether to control is decided before the definite special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S155), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is “non-probable change” corresponding to non-probable big hit, the big hit type buffer value is “0”, and if “probable change A” corresponding to probable big hit A is “1”, the probable big hit B If it is “probability variation B” corresponding to, “2” may be set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S151 that it is not “big hit” (S151; N), the process proceeds to S156.

  In S156, the decision is made in accordance with the result of the prior determination of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set), and the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. Set a special symbol. As an example, a special symbol indicating a symbol “-” that becomes a loss symbol is set as a confirmed special symbol in response to a pre-determined result indicating that the special symbol display result is “miss”. If it is determined in S151 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, “3”, “5”, “7”, which are big hit symbols, according to the determination result of the big hit type in S154. One of the special symbols indicating numbers is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is set as the confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is “non-probable change”. In addition, a special symbol indicating the number “7” is set as a confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “probability variation A”. The special symbol indicating the number “5” is set as the confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is “probability variation B”.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in S156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S157), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  If the total number of reserved memories is “0” in S141 (S141; Y), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (S158), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S23 of FIG. 11 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (S161). If the big hit flag is on (S161; Y), the big hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (S162).

  When the big hit flag is OFF in S161 (S161; N), for example, by determining whether or not the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is ON (is set), etc. It is determined whether or not the short-time control is being performed when the short-time control is performed when the state is the certain change state or the short-time state (S163). If the time reduction flag is on (S163; Y), the deviation variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns (S164).

  On the other hand, when the time reduction control is not being performed, that is, when the time reduction flag is off (when not set) (S163; N), for example, the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 The total reserved memory number is specified by reading the stored value, and it is determined whether the specified total reserved memory number is 2 or more (S165).

  If the specified total number of reserved memories is not 2 or more (S165; N), the variation pattern determination table A for detachment is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns ( S166).

  If the specified total reserved memory number is 2 or more (S165; Y), the process proceeds to S167, and it is further determined whether or not the total reserved memory number is 5 or more (S167).

  If the total number of reserved memories is not 5 or more (S167; N), the variation pattern determination table B for detachment is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns (S168). .

  If the total number of reserved memories is 5 or more (S167; Y), the deviation variation pattern determination table C is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns. (S169).

  After executing any of the processes of S162, S164, S166, S168, and S169, the data is selected based on numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination stored in the variation random number buffer, for example. By referring to either the big hit variation pattern determination table or the loss variation pattern determination tables A to D, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (S170).

  When the big hit flag is off, it is determined whether or not the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “reach” by determining the variation pattern in the process of S170. In other words, the process of S170 includes a process of determining whether or not the change display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state when the change display result is “out”.

  After the variation pattern is determined in S170, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B in accordance with the variation special symbol designation buffer value. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the special symbol games using the two special symbols (S171). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B is performed.

  Subsequent to the processing of S171, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the change of the special symbol (S172). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variation display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance. Is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a game state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variation display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designation command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Stored in the buffer area.

  After executing the process of S172, a special figure fluctuation time which is a fluctuation display time of a special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern is set (S173). The special figure fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the fluctuation display result (special figure display result) is derived and displayed. It is. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (S174), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  Based on the command transmission setting in S172, every time the command control process in S17 shown in FIG. 10 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, a game state designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variation display result designation command, the first reserved storage number notification command, or the second reserved storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Note that the order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, or the variation pattern designation command is transmitted after the variation display result designation command is first transmitted. The game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command, or the second reserved memory number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S25 of FIG. 11 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process of S24 to end the variation of the special symbol, and stops at the first special symbol display unit 4A or the second special symbol display unit 4B. Control for deriving and displaying symbols is performed (S181). If the variation special symbol designation buffer value is “1” indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is In the case of “2” indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol indicator 4B is terminated. Moreover, control which transmits a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 is performed (S182). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (S183). If the big hit flag is not set (S183; N), the process proceeds to S190.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is set (S183; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and the hourly flag if the probability change flag and the hourly flag are set (S184), and the effect control board 12 The jackpot start 1 designation command (probability variation A), jackpot start 2 designation command (probability variation B), and jackpot start 3 designation command (non-probability variation) are set in accordance with the stored jackpot type (S185). ).

  Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the effect control board 12 (S186).

  Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time for which, for example, the effect display device 5 notifies that the jackpot has occurred) is set in the jackpot display time timer (S187). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 16 times in the case of non-probable big hit or probable big hit A, and 5 times in the case of probable big hit B) is set in the big prize opening number counter (S188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (S26) (S189).

  On the other hand, in S190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. When the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S190; Y), the process proceeds to S196.

  On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (S190; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction count remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (S191). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is “0” (S193). If it is not “0” (S193; N), the process proceeds to S196, and the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. ”(S193; Y), in order to end the time reduction control, after clearing the time reduction flag (S194), the gaming state (specifically, the low probability After setting the transmission of the gaming state designation command corresponding to (low base) (S195), the process proceeds to S196.

  In S196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and then the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S29 of FIG. 11 as the big hit end process.

  In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (S201). When the jackpot end display timer is not in operation (S201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for jackpot end display in the effect display device 5 (the jackpot end display time). The setting is made (S204), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is operating (S201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (S205). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (S206). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (S206; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored big hit type is the probability variation big hit A or the probability variation big hit B (S207).

  When the big hit type is the probable big hit A or the probable big hit B (S207; Y), after setting the probability variation flag (S208), the hour / hour flag (S209), and setting the hour / hour count counter to “0” (S210), the process proceeds to S213.

  On the other hand, when the big hit type is not the probable big hit A or the probable big hit B (S207; N), by executing S211 and S212, the hour / hour flag is set and “100” is set in the hour / hour counter, and then S213. Proceed to

  In S213, the jackpot flag is cleared, and the jackpot end designation command transmission setting according to the jackpot type is performed (S214). Then, after setting the transmission of a game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the set probability change flag and the time reduction flag (S215), the special figure process flag value is processed as a special symbol normal process. Is updated to “0”, which is a value corresponding to (S216).

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S51). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on) in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53) and executes the following process.

  The effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag in accordance with the received effect control command (command analysis process: S54). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 3) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (S55). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 5 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number update process for updating the counter value for generating effect random numbers such as jackpot symbol determination random numbers is executed (S56), and then the process proceeds to S52.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S55) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice effect determination process for determining the presence / absence of the pre-reading notice effect and the effect type of the pre-reading notice effect (S71). A hold display update process is executed to update the hold storage display in the hold storage display area 5D to a display corresponding to the stored contents of the start command reception command buffer 194A (S72).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of S73 to S79 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern designation command is received in the command analysis process. If the change pattern designation command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (S74).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (S74): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S75).

  Production symbol variation processing (S75): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S76).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (S76): Based on the reception of the effect control command (symbol confirmation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S77) or the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

  Jackpot display process (S77): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 5 of the occurrence of a jackpot. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (S78).

  Big hit game processing (S78): Control during the big hit game is performed. For example, when receiving a special command during opening of the special prize opening or a designation command after opening the special prize opening, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S79).

  Big hit end effect process (S79): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S71 of FIG. 19 as the prefetch notice effect determination process. In the pre-reading notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 20, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 194A (S241) and counts down whether or not there is a new storage of the start winning command. The determination is made based on whether or not there is an entry for which the notice effect target flag and the chance eye notice effect target flag are not set (S242).

  If there is no entry in which the countdown notice effect target flag and the chance eye notice effect target flag are not set (S242; N), the prefetch notice effect determination process is terminated, and the countdown notice effect target flag and the chance eye notice effect target flag are ended. If there is an entry that is not set (S242; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an entry that stores a first symbol designation command indicating that it is a big hit pending storage before the entry (S242; Y). S243). If there is an entry in which the first symbol designation command is stored before the entry (S243; Y), the process proceeds to S248, and if there is no entry in which the first symbol designation command is stored (S243; N), the entry It is determined whether or not all the variation category designation commands stored in the entry before the entry are non-reach variation category designation commands (S244).

  If all the floating category designation commands stored in the entry before the entry are not non-reachable fluctuation category designation commands (S244; N), the process proceeds to S248, and the variation category designation command stored in the entry before the entry is changed. In the case of all non-reach variation category designation commands (S224; Y), for example, numerical data indicating random numbers for prefetching notice effects extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193, and the entry By referring to a prefetching notice effect determination table (not shown) based on the fluctuation category, the presence / absence of execution of the prefetching notice effect and the effect type are determined (S245).

  In S245, for example, the presence / absence of the pre-reading notice effect and the effect type are determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 21, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the determination ratio of the effect type are varied according to the variation category of the entry.

  Specifically, as the effect type of the pre-reading notice effect, the first chance notice effect in which the effect symbols are derived and displayed in an even number of combinations such as “224” and “446” in the variation display before the variation display of the prefetch target. In the variation display before the variation display of the look-ahead target, the second chance notice effect that derives and displays the effect symbol by an odd number combination such as “113” and “335”, and the variation display before the variation display of the look-ahead target There are three types, a countdown notice effect that executes a countdown at each start. In this embodiment, the chance eye notice effect is illustrated as the first specific effect in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first specific effect is for any variable display. If it is a pre-reading notice effect that is executed over a plurality of continuous variable displays without clearly informing the player whether or not it is, for example, a background image is displayed over a plurality of continuous variable displays, etc. There may be. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the countdown notice effect is illustrated as the second specific effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second specific effect is intended for any variable display. It is only necessary to provide a pre-reading notice effect that is clearly notified to the player and executed over a plurality of continuous variation displays.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21, when the variation category of the entry is “non-reach”, non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at a rate of 100%, and the variation category of the entry is “other”. The non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%, the execution of the first chance notice effect is decided at a rate of 15%, and the execution of the second chance notice effect is decided at a rate of 5%. . Further, when the variation category of the entry is “super reach”, non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at a rate of 70%, execution of the first chance notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%, The execution of the second chance notice effect is determined at a rate of 20%. If the change category of the entry is “special reach”, the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at a rate of 20%, the execution of the second chance notice effect is determined at a rate of 30%, and the countdown The execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 50%.

  With this setting, when the execution of the countdown notice effect is determined, the variable display of the prefetch target is special at a higher rate than when the execution of the first chance notice effect or the second chance notice effect is determined. It is executed in the reach variation pattern. In addition, when execution of the second chance notice effect is determined, the pre-reading change display is executed in a special reach change pattern at a higher rate than when the first chance notice effect is determined. It is like that. When the execution of the first chance notice effect is decided, the change display of the look-ahead target is executed in the special reach change pattern at a higher rate than when the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is decided. It has become.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, the change display of the pre-reading object is executed in the special reach change pattern more than when the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. Since the rate at which the variation display of the prefetch target is executed in the special reach variation pattern is different depending on the production type of the prefetching notice effect, whether or not the prefetching notice effect is executed, The player is made to pay attention to the effect type of the pre-reading notice effect to be executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, three types of the first chance notice effect, the second chance notice effect, and the countdown notice effect are exemplified as the effect types of the prefetch notice effect. However, the present invention is limited to this. It is not a thing, and there may be 2 types or less, or 4 or more types of presentation effects of a prefetch notice effect.

  In this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, only one of the first chance notice effect, the second chance notice effect, and the countdown notice effect is executed. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the execution of two or more types of pre-reading notice effects such as the first chance notice effect and the countdown notice effect, the second chance notice effect and the countdown notice effect, etc. are duplicated. May be determined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the chance eye notice effect, an example is shown in which a combination of effect symbols indicating a deviation is derived and displayed with an even number combination such as “224” or an odd number combination such as “113”. The present invention is not limited to this, and as a chance eye notice effect, a combination of effect symbols indicating a deviation may be derived and displayed by an even number combination or an odd number combination.

  Moreover, although the present embodiment illustrates a form that suggests that the change display is executed with the special reach change pattern by executing the pre-reading notice effect, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the pre-reading notice effect may indicate that the variation display result is a big hit in addition to the suggestion that the variation display is executed in the special reach variation pattern.

  After execution of S245, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the execution of the countdown notice effect is determined in S245 (S246). When the execution of the countdown notice effect is determined in S245 (S246; Y), “1” indicating that the countdown notice effect is to be executed is set in the countdown notice effect target flag of the entry, and the chance chance notice of the entry “0” indicating that non-execution of the chance eye notice effect has been decided is set in the effect target flag, and the prefetch notice effect determination process is terminated (S249, S250).

  If the execution of the countdown notice effect is not determined in S245 (S246; N), it is determined whether or not the execution of the first chance notice effect or the second chance notice effect is decided in S245 (S247). ). When it is determined in S245 that the first chance eye notice effect or the second chance eye notice effect is not executed (S247; N), the process proceeds to S248, and in S245, the first chance eye notice effect or the second chance notice effect is performed. When execution is determined (S247; Y), “0” indicating that the countdown notice effect is not executed is set in the countdown notice effect target flag of the entry (S251), and execution is determined in S245. It is determined whether or not is a first chance eye notice effect (S252).

  When it is the first chance announcement effect that has been determined to be executed in S245 (S252; Y), “1” indicating that the execution of the first chance announcement effect has been decided for the chance eye announcement effect target flag of the entry. ”Is set to end the pre-reading notice effect determination process (S253), and if it is the second chance notice effect that has been determined to be executed in S245 (S252; N), the chance eye notice effect flag for the entry Then, “2” indicating that execution of the second chance notice effect is decided is set, and the prefetch notice effect decision process is finished (S254).

  In S248, “0” is set in each of the countdown notice effect target flag and the chance eye notice effect target flag of the entry, and the prefetch notice effect determination process is terminated.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S74) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation start command reception flag is set in S271 (S271). When the variation start command reception flag is not set (S271; N), the effect symbol variation start process is terminated, and when the variation start command reception flag is set (S271; Y), the start winning reception command is received. The various command data and the various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “8” of the special figure reservation memory in the buffer 194A are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). Note that the contents of the buffer number “0” are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift.

  After execution of S272, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (S273).

  Next, with reference to the value of the chance eye advancement effect target flag stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “8” of the special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer 194A after the shift, these chance items are referred to. It is determined whether or not “1” or “2” is set to any of the values of the notice effect target flag, that is, whether or not the execution of the chance notice effect is determined (S274). When “0” is set to the value of all the chance eye notice effect target flags (S274; N), the fluctuation pattern designating command read in S273 is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is the big hit fluctuation pattern. It is determined whether or not (S275).

  When the variation pattern of the variation display is a big hit variation pattern (S275; Y), the stop symbol of the effect design is determined from the combination indicating the big hit according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area. The process proceeds to S283 (S276). The combination indicating the big hit is, for example, “333” or “777” when the big hit type is “probability variation A”, and “111” or the like when the big hit type is “probability variation B”. It is determined to be an odd combination excluding “333” and “777” such as “555”, and when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, it may be determined to be an even combination such as “222” or “444”. .

  In S275, when the variation pattern of the variation display is an outlier variation pattern (S275; N), the stop symbol of the effect symbol is deviated according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area. It is determined from a combination of even and odd numbers (S277). Then, with reference to the value of the countdown notice effect target flag stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “8” in the special figure holding memory in the start winning reception command buffer 194A after the shift, these countdown notice effects are referred to. It is determined whether or not “1” is set in any of the values of the target flag, that is, whether or not execution of the countdown notice effect is determined (S278).

  When “1” is set to any of the values of the countdown notice effect target flag (S278; Y), the countdown notice effect is displayed in the countdown notice effect start waiting timer in order to execute the countdown notice effect in the variable display. A value corresponding to the period up to the start time is set and the process proceeds to S283 (S279). If all the countdown notice effect target flag values are set to “0” (S278; N), the process goes through S279. Without proceeding to S283.

  In S274, when “1” or “2” is set to the value of any chance eye advancement effect target flag (S274; Y), the value of any chance eye advancement effect target flag is set to “ It is determined whether or not “1” is set (S280). When “1” is set to the value of any chance eye notice effect target flag (S280; Y), the stop symbol of the effect symbol is set according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area. The number is determined from an even number of combinations indicating “displacement” (such as “224” or “446” as the first chance eye notice effect described above), and the process proceeds to S283 (S281). When “2” is set (S280; N), the stop symbol of the effect symbol is combined with an odd number of combinations indicating the disparity (the second chance described above) according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area. (“113”, “335”, etc.) as the notice effect) and the process proceeds to S283 (S282).

  In S283, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the variation pattern designation command read out in S273, and determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variation display is a special reach variation pattern. If the variation pattern of the variation display is not a special reach variation pattern (S283; N), an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command is selected and the process proceeds to S288 (S284), and variation of the variation display is performed. If the pattern is a special reach variation pattern (S283; Y), the countdown notice effect target flag stored in association with the buffer number “0” of the special figure holding storage in the start winning reception command buffer 194A after the shift. , And whether or not the value of the countdown notice effect target flag is set to “1”, that is, whether or not the change display is the target change display of the countdown notice effect (the change display is prefetched). Whether or not the countdown notice effect was executed until the last change display as a target) To (S285).

  When the value of the countdown notice effect target flag stored in association with the buffer number “0” is set to “0” (S285; N), the special variation pattern corresponding to the non-execution of the countdown notice effect is displayed. When an effect control pattern (process table) is selected and the process proceeds to S288 (S286), the value of the countdown notice effect target flag stored in association with the buffer number “0” is set to “1” (S285). ; Y) selects an effect control pattern (process table) of a special variation pattern according to the execution of the countdown notice effect, and proceeds to S288 (S287).

  In S288, the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in any of S284, S286, and S287 is started.

  The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 5, operation control execution data for controlling the operation of the movable accessory 400, and LED control for controlling lighting of each LED. Execution data, sound control execution data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like are sequentially arranged in time series in association with each process data n (from No. 1 to N).

  Next, the production control CPU 120 performs the production device (the production display device 5 as the production component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, operation control execution data, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1). Then, the control of the movable accessory 400 as the production component, various LEDs, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the production component is executed (S289). For example, in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 5, a command is output to the display control unit 123. Further, in order to operate the movable accessory 400, a drive signal is output to the accessory drive motor 411. In addition, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to perform various LED on / off control. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  In the present embodiment, the production control CPU 120 controls the production pattern to be displayed in a variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command in a one-to-one manner. However, the production control CPU 120 performs the variation pattern designation. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the command.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern designation command is set in the variation time timer (S290). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (S291). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right effect symbols to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 is written to the VRAM. The signal corresponding to the image data is output to the effect display device 5, and the effect display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variation of the effect symbol. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S75) (S292).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation in-process (S75) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the values of the process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer by 1 (S301, S302, S303). In addition, the production control CPU 120 has a countdown notice effect start wait timer set (determined to perform the countdown notice effect) or a countdown notice effect executing flag is set (countdown notice effect) (S304; Y), the countdown notice effect process shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S305). If neither the countdown notice effect start waiting timer nor the countdown notice effect executing flag is set, the process proceeds to S306 without executing the notice effect process of S305.

  In S306, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has expired, the process data is switched (S307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table in the process timer (S308). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on the display control execution data, operation control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, and the like set next (S309a). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the rendering device (for rendering) according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, operation control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, etc.) The control of the component is executed (S309b).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation control timer has expired (S310). When the variation control timer has timed out (S310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the effect symbol of the left middle right (30 ms after the previous effect symbol display switching time). Image data of the power screen) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (S311). In this manner, the effect display device 5 can implement the effect control of the effect symbols. The display control unit 123 sends a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the effect display device 5. Output. As such, the effect display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the effect symbol in the effect symbol variation. Further, a predetermined value is reset in the fluctuation control timer (S312).

  If the variation control timer has not timed out (S310; N), after executing S312, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variation time timer has expired (S313). If the variation time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S76) (S315). Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (S314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set to the effect symbol variation stop processing ( The value is updated according to S76) (S315). Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control for stopping variation.For example, a variation pattern designation command indicating a long variation time due to noise between substrates is used. Even in the case of reception, the variation of the effect symbol can be terminated when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol is finished).

  In the process table used for the variation control of the effect symbol, process data during the effect symbol variation display is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the production symbol variation time. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n is timed out in the process of S306, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, LED control execution data, etc.), and the effect control of the effect symbol based on the process table is completed. To do.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the countdown notice effect process. In the countdown notice effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the countdown notice effect executing flag is set, that is, whether or not the countdown notice effect is started (S321).

  When the countdown notice effect executing flag is not set (S321; N), in S322, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the countdown notice effect start wait timer by -1. If the countdown notice effect start wait timer has not timed out (S323; N), the countdown notice effect process is terminated. If the countdown notice effect start wait timer has timed out, that is, if it is the start timing of the countdown notice effect (S323; Y), the flow proceeds to S324.

  In S324, the CPU 120 for effect control sets a countdown notice effect executing flag indicating that the countdown notice effect is being executed. Further, a value corresponding to the countdown notice effect period corresponding to the countdown notice effect is set in the countdown notice effect period timer (S325).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 reads and sets the countdown notice effect process table corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuation displays until the change display as the prefetch target (S326), and then in the process data 1 of the selected countdown notice effect process table. The countdown notice effect process timer is started (S327). In this embodiment, a countdown notice effect process table corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuation displays until the fluctuation display that is a prefetch target is stored in the ROM 121 in advance.

  The effect control CPU 120 then displays the contents of the first process data 1 of the set notice effect process table (display control execution data 1, movable control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution. According to the data 1 etc., the control of the effect device (the effect display device 5 as the effect component, the movable accessory 400, the game effect LED 9 as the effect component and the speakers 8L and 8R as the effect components) is executed to count down the notice. The effect process ends (S328).

  If the countdown notice effect executing flag is set in S321, the process proceeds to S329, and the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the countdown notice effect process timer for changing the process of the countdown notice effect to -1. To do. Then, the value of the countdown notice effect period timer for timing the end of the countdown notice effect period is decremented by 1 (S330). When the countdown notice effect period timer has timed out (value becomes 0) (S331; Y), the countdown notice effect executing flag is cleared and the countdown notice effect processing ends (S336).

  When the countdown notice effect period timer has not timed out (S331; N), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the countdown notice effect process timer has timed out (S332). If the countdown notice effect process timer has timed out, the notice effect process data of the countdown notice effect is switched (S333). That is, the process timer is started anew by setting the next-notice effect process timer setting value set in the countdown notice effect process table in the process timer (S334). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) based on the display control execution data, the movable control execution data, the LED control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc. included in the countdown notice effect process data set next. (S335), and the notice effect processing is terminated.

  In this way, by executing the control of the countdown notice effect process based on the countdown notice effect process table and the countdown notice effect process timer, the countdown notice effect is started at the start timing in the countdown notice effect process table. The control contents of the notice effect described in the countdown notice effect process table are executed, so that the countdown notice effect is executed until the period of the countdown notice effect ends.

  As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect symbol variation start processing, the effect symbol variation in-process, and the countdown notice effect processing, the variation display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach α. As shown in FIG. 25 (A), reach is reached when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and the reach effect of super reach α is executed over 23 seconds from the time when 10 seconds have passed. Further, when the fluctuation display is executed with a fluctuation pattern of super reach β, as shown in FIG. 25B, reach is reached when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and when further 10 seconds have passed. The reach production of Super Reach β is executed for 33 seconds.

  Furthermore, when the fluctuation display is executed in the special reach fluctuation pattern, if the countdown notice effect is not executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display (the chance is shown in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display). As shown in FIG. 26 (A), the movable accessory 400 is operated for 5 seconds from the time when 1 second has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Then, the reach effect of super reach β is executed for 33 seconds from the end of the operation of the movable accessory. Further, if the countdown notice effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display, as shown in FIG. 26B, the movable accessory 400 is operated for 6 seconds from the start of the variation. Then, the reach effect of super reach β is executed for 33 seconds from the end of the operation of the movable accessory.

  As shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, in this embodiment, the countdown notice effect is executed when the countdown notice effect is not executed in the change display immediately before the change display. While the operation start timing of the movable accessory 400 differs depending on the case, the timing at which the reach of the super reach β is started after the operation of the movable accessory 400 is completed is the same. For this reason, when the countdown notice effect is not executed in the change display immediately before the change display and when the countdown notice effect is executed, for the effect control after the timing when the reach effect of the super reach β is started. The processing of the CPU 120 can be shared, and the processing load of the effect control CPU 120 accompanying the change display is reduced.

  Next, the display mode in the effect display device 5 and the operation mode of the movable accessory 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, as shown in FIGS. 27 (A) to 27 (C), when the countdown notice effect is not executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the special reach change pattern, the combination in which the effect symbols are out of place. When the variation display in the special reach variation pattern is started after being derived and displayed at, as shown in FIG. 27D, the movable accessory 400 operates for 5 seconds from one second after the start of the variation. .

  Specifically, the movable accessory 400 moves from the retracted position above the effect display device 5 toward the effect position in front of the effect display device 5. Then, when the movable combination 400 moves again from the production position toward the retreat position and the operation period of 5 seconds of the movable combination 400 ends, as shown in FIG. Reach production of reach β is started.

  In addition, when the countdown notice effect is executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the special reach change pattern, as shown in FIGS. 28 (A) to 28 (E), the effect is displayed as the countdown notice effect. Every time symbol variation display is started, notification of the number of remaining variations until the variation display in the special reach variation pattern is executed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 29 (F) to 29 (H), when the variation display in the special reach variation pattern is started, based on the fact that the countdown notice effect has been executed in the previous variation display, Simultaneously with the start of the variable display, the movable accessory 400 operates for 6 seconds.

  Specifically, the movable accessory 400 moves from the retracted position above the effect display device 5 toward the effect position in front of the effect display device 5. Then, when the movable accessory 400 moves again from the effect position toward the retracted position and the operation period for 6 seconds of the movable accessory 400 ends, as shown in FIG. Reach production of reach β is started.

  Further, when the chance eye notice effect is executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the special reach change pattern, as shown in FIGS. 30 (A) to 30 (E), as the chance eye notice effect, Each time the variable display is executed, the effect symbols are derived and displayed in a combination such as “224” or “113”. Then, as shown in FIGS. 31 (F) to 31 (H), when the change display in the special reach change pattern is started, the chance eye notice effect is executed in the immediately preceding change display. Based on this, the movable accessory 400 operates for 5 seconds after 1 second from the start of fluctuation.

  Specifically, the movable accessory 400 moves from the retracted position above the effect display device 5 toward the effect position in front of the effect display device 5. Then, when the movable combination 400 moves again from the production position toward the retreat position and the operation period of 5 seconds of the movable combination 400 ends, as shown in FIG. Reach production of reach β is started.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the special reach in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach β is performed after the movable accessory 400 is operated. If the countdown notice effect that indicates that the change display with the change pattern is executed is executed, the special reach is used when the countdown notice effect is not executed in the change display with the special reach change pattern. The game entertainment can be improved by starting the operation of the movable accessory 400, which is executed one second after the start of the change display in the change pattern, from the start of the change.

  In addition, when the countdown notice effect is executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern. Since the operation of the movable accessory 400 is started at a timing closer to the start timing of the change display than when the countdown notification effect is not executed in FIG. Can be easily recognized, and can improve the game entertainment.

  In particular, when the countdown notice effect is not executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern, the movable accessory 400 is operated from the timing one second after the start of the variation display in the special reach variation pattern. When the countdown notice effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern, the movable accessory 400 is operated from the start timing of the variation display in the special reach variation pattern. It is easier for the user to recognize the relationship between the countdown notice effect and the operation of the movable accessory 400, and when the countdown notice effect is executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the special reach change pattern. It is easy to recognize that the operation start timing of the movable accessory 400 is different when it is not It is possible, it is possible to improve the game interest.

  In this embodiment, when the countdown notice effect is not executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern, the movable combination is started from the timing one second after the start of the variation display in the special reach variation pattern. When the object 400 is operated and the countdown notice effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern, the movable accessory 400 is operated from the start timing of the variation display in the special reach variation pattern. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the countdown notice effect is not executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern, the special reach variation pattern is used. The timing for operating the movable accessory 400 in the variable display is the start timing of the variable display. The timing may be any later, and when the countdown notice effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern, the movable accessory 400 is displayed in the variation display in the special reach variation pattern. The timing to operate is earlier than the timing to operate the movable accessory 400 in the variation display in the special reach variation pattern when the countdown notice effect is not executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern. For example, the timing may not be “simultaneous” with the start of the variable display, for example, 0.5 seconds after the start of the variable display.

  Also, in this embodiment, as a pre-reading notice effect that pre-reads that the variation display is executed in the special reach variation pattern, a countdown that gradually suggests the number of remaining variation displays until the variation display of the special reach variation pattern in each variation display. Since the notice effect is executed, the player can have an expectation that the change display is executed according to the special reach change pattern, so that the game interest can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the countdown notice effect is illustrated as an effect that gradually suggests the remaining number of fluctuation displays until the special reach fluctuation pattern is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the countdown notice is not limited thereto. The effect may be an effect that gradually suggests real time until the display of the variation of the special reach variation pattern is started.

  In the present embodiment, as the second specific effect in the present invention, a countdown notice effect that gradually suggests the number of remaining fluctuation displays until the fluctuation display of the special reach fluctuation pattern is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is a pre-reading notice effect that allows the player to specify the number of remaining fluctuation display until the fluctuation display of the special reach fluctuation pattern, it is possible to execute an effect other than the countdown notice effect such as a count-up effect. Good.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, as a countdown notice effect, an example is shown in which the number of remaining fluctuation displays until the fluctuation display of the special reach fluctuation pattern is indicated by numbers. The number of remaining changes until the special reach change pattern is displayed in a form other than numbers (for example, the length of the bomb lead wire or the amount of sand remaining in the hourglass). Also good.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as a pre-reading notice effect that pre-reads that the fluctuation display is executed in the special reach fluctuation pattern, the chance eye notice effect can be executed in addition to the countdown notice effect. When the countdown notice effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in, the movable accessory 400 is operated from the start timing of the variation display in the special reach variation pattern, while the variation in the special reach variation pattern is performed. When the chance announcement effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the display, the movable accessory 400 is operated from the timing one second after the start of the variable display in the special reach variation pattern, that is, the special reach variation. The pre-reading notice effect that is executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in the pattern is counted down. Because with different operation start timing of the movable role object 400 depending on whether the notice or opportunity th prediction effect is directed, it can be improved gaming interest.

  In this embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory 400 depends on whether the pre-reading notice effect executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the special reach change pattern is a countdown notice effect or a chance eye notice effect. Although the start timings are different, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is a chance whether the pre-reading notice effect executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the special reach change pattern is a countdown notice effect. The operation of the movable accessory 400 may be started from the same timing regardless of the notice effect.

  In addition, as a variation pattern of the present embodiment, a variation pattern having a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach, as shown in FIG. 25, the operation of the movable accessory 400 is not performed and the variation display is performed. As shown in FIG. 26, the movement pattern of the super-reach α and the super-reach β starting the reach production 20 seconds after the start, and the movement of the movable accessory 400 is executed and the reach production is started 6 seconds after the start of the change display. Since the variation pattern of the special reach to be started is provided, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the operation of the movable accessory 400 is executed during the variation display, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the case where the countdown advance notice effect is executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the special reach change pattern, and the case where the countdown notice effect is not executed, the operation of the movable accessory 400 is changed in the special reach change. The process after the completion of the operation of the movable accessory 400 can be made common by ending 6 seconds after the start of the variation display in the pattern (the movement of the movable accessory 400 from the effect position to the retracted position is completed). It is possible to reduce the processing load of the effect control CPU 120 associated with the variation display in the reach variation pattern.

  In this embodiment, in the special reach fluctuation pattern, when the countdown notice effect is executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the special reach change pattern and when the countdown notice effect is not executed. Although the mode which makes the subsequent processing common by ending the operation of the movable accessory 400 in the variable display at the same timing is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special reach variation pattern is used. The timing of ending the operation of the movable accessory 400 may be different between the case where the countdown notice effect is executed in the change display immediately before the change display and the case where the countdown notice effect is not executed.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It is.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the movable accessory 400 is moved between the retracted position and the effect position is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable accessory is activated when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. It may be confirmed whether or not the movable accessory 400 can be normally operated by moving the object 400.

  In this way, when it is confirmed whether or not the movable accessory 400 is operable when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the following operations shown in FIGS. First, it is determined whether or not the movable accessory 400 is located at the retracted position by a retraction position detection sensor or the like (not shown). If the movable accessory 400 is not located at the retracted position, as shown in FIG. The control CPU 120 executes a control to move the movable accessory 400 to the retracted position as the non-detection operation by driving the accessory driving motor 411. When the movable accessory 400 is located at the retracted position, the effect control CPU 120 drives the accessory driving motor 411 to control the movable accessory 400 between the retracted position and the effect position as the operation control at the time of detection. Then, the movable accessory 400 is moved again to the retracted position.

  Further, after executing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable accessory 400 from the retracted position to the effect position, as shown in FIG. The actual operation check operation control for moving the effect position again to the retreat position is executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (A) to 33 (C), when performing the actual operation check operation control, the effect control CPU 120 accelerates from the retracted position and then decelerates to stop at the exercise ground position. At the same time, control is performed to accelerate from the exercise position and then decelerate to stop at the retreat position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that the movable accessory 400 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable accessory 400 is set to low speed → high speed → between the retreat position and the exercise ground position. Change in ascending order.

  On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 always performs the actual operation check operation in the period during which the movable accessory 400 is moved from the retracted position to the effect position and during the period from the effect position to the retracted position when performing the operation control at the time of detection. Control is performed so that the movable accessory 400 operates at the minimum speed in the control. Further, when performing the non-detection operation control, the effect control CPU 120 always moves the movable accessory 400 at the minimum speed in the operation check operation control during the period in which the movable accessory 400 is moved to the retracted position. To control.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation confirmation operation control, the detection operation control, and the non-detection operation control, so that the movable accessory 400 always performs the actual operation when the non-detection operation control is executed. Since the operation can be stopped at any timing by operating at the minimum speed in the confirmation operation control, the movable accessory 400 can be positioned at the retracted position without fear of being damaged by a collision or the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display is executed in the special reach variation pattern, the mode in which the movable accessory 400 is always operated is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special reach variation is performed. When performing the variable display with the pattern, whether or not to perform the operation of the movable accessory 400 may be determined by lottery. In the case where it is determined by lottery whether or not the operation of the movable accessory 400 is to be executed, the execution of the operation of the movable accessory 400 is determined at a rate of 100% using a table for determining the operation of the movable accessory 400. May be.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which provides the movable accessory 400 in the pachinko game machine 1 was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, Even if a plurality of movable accessories are provided in the pachinko game machine 1, Good. In addition, when providing a plurality of movable accessories in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, a movable accessory that operates when the countdown notice effect is not executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern, The movable accessory that operates when the countdown notice effect is being executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern may be different.

  Further, in the embodiment, when the countdown notice effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern, the variation in the special reach variation pattern is performed in the variation display in the special reach variation pattern. The mode in which the movable accessory 400 is operated at the timing before the case where the countdown notice effect is not executed in the variable display immediately before the display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special reach is performed. When the countdown notice effect is executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in the fluctuation pattern, the countdown notice is given in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern. Movable accessory 4 at a later timing than when the performance is not executed 0 to the may be operated, may be operated movable won game 400 in the variable display before or after the variable display of the special reach varying patterns.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable accessory 400 is set to 1 when both the countdown notice effect is executed and the countdown notice effect is not executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the special reach change pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special reach variation is performed when the countdown notice effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern. In addition to the timing when the countdown notice effect is not executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the pattern, the movable accessory 400 may be operated at another timing. Further, as described above, when a plurality of movable accessories are provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movable accessory operated at the first operation timing is different from the movable accessory operated at the second operation timing. May be.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the movable body in this invention was illustrated as the movable accessory 400 which moves between a retracted position and production | presentation position, this invention is not limited to this, In this invention The movable body may perform operations such as rotation and vibration at a specific position.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the movable accessory 400 is operated only when the variable display is executed with the special reach variation pattern is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the non-reach or normal reach The movable accessory 400 may be operated in a part of the variable display of the super reach α and the super reach β.

  Further, in the embodiment, when the countdown notice effect that is the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the special reach change pattern, the movable combination is started from the start timing of the change display in the special reach change pattern. Although the form which operates the thing 400 was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, When productions other than a prefetch notice effect are performed in the fluctuation | variation display just before the fluctuation | variation display in a special reach fluctuation pattern. The movable accessory 400 may be operated from the start timing of the change display in the special reach change pattern.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of gaming balls are inside the gaming machine. The number of loaned balls that are enclosed in a circulating manner and lent in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls that are awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines that are stored in the memory. In these enclosed game machines, not the game ball but points and points are given to the player, so these points and points assigned correspond to the game value.

  Moreover, in the said Example, in order to notify the variation pattern which shows variation modes, such as variation time and the kind of reach production, to CPU120 for production control, the example which transmits one variation pattern designation | designated command when a variation is started. Although shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control CPU 120 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the CPU 103 uses the first command to indicate, for example, the variation time and variation mode before reaching reach (when not reaching, before the so-called second stop). The second command indicates the variation time and variation mode after reaching the reach (after the so-called second stop if the reach is not reached), such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect. The command may be transmitted, or only the variation time is notified by the first command and the second command, and the specific variation mode executed at each timing is directed to the direction control CPU 120. You may make it select with. When two commands are sent, the two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is transmitted, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Thus, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which launches a game ball from the downward direction rather than a game area | region with the hitting ball launcher was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, For example, the said hitting ball launcher is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 The game ball may be launched from a position above the game area by providing it at a position above the game area.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which only a big hit that can acquire a large number of game balls is generated by opening a big winning opening in the big hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability variation jackpot B is suddenly shortened due to the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot B by making the opening time of the big prize opening in the round game extremely short so that the player does not recognize that the big prize opening has been opened. It is good also as a sudden big hit that makes it appear as if it is in a probable state. In addition, when these probability variation big hits B are used as sudden big hits, a small hit that opens the big prize opening with the same opening pattern as the opening pattern of the big prize opening in the big hit game of the probability variation big hit B is provided. A state (so-called latent state) in which it is unknown whether the gaming state after the occurrence of the probable big hit B or the small hit is a high probability state or a low probability state may occur.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which made the start prize opening two into the 1st start prize opening and the 2nd start prize opening is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, A start prize opening It is good also as one, and it is good also as a start winning opening 3 or more.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which made the special symbol two types, the 1st special figure and the 2nd special figure, is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, Only one special symbol is included. The special symbol may be 3 or more.

  In the above embodiment, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol that is the display result, and then stop display the final stop symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after a variable display of a plurality of types of special symbols without including the final stop symbol that is the display result, the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It may be. That is, the final stop symbol as a display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for the variable display.

  The state advantageous to the player means a specific game state (big hit etc.) advantageous to a player that can acquire a lot of game media, and a plurality of types of specific game states (expected values of game media that can be acquired) ( A big hit with a different number of rounds), a high base state (time-short state) in which a winning ball payout condition is more easily established than in a normal gaming state, or a high-probability gaming state (high probability state) with a high probability of becoming the specific gaming state ), A high probability low base state (latency probability variation state), a special reach state (for example, super reach, etc.), a state in which the variation pattern is a variation pattern based on the jackpot variation pattern, and the like.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown to the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display, and moves between a specific operation (for example, a retracted position and an effect position). ) And a specific variable display by a movable variable (for example, movable accessory 400) and a specific variable display pattern (for example, a super reach variation pattern including a special reach variation pattern) among a plurality of variable display patterns. In this case, the movable body effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing the movable body effect for operating the movable body from the first timing of the specific variable display (for example, the timing one second after the start of the variable display). The CPU 120 executes a specific effect (for example, a countdown notice effect) that is different from the movable object effect and a part where the effect symbol change start process and the effect symbol change process are executed. A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes a countdown notice effect process), and the movable body effect executing means is configured to display the specific effect in the variable display immediately before the specific variable display. If it has been executed, the movable body effect can be executed from a second timing different from the first timing (for example, the start timing of the variable display), and a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player Display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to (for example, an effect control microcomputer 90200 for displaying items corresponding to a plurality of types of music as shown in FIG. 60), and any one of the plurality of items Selection effect means capable of executing a selection effect for selecting the item (effect system for changing the item selected by the selection operation as shown in FIG. Microcomputer 90200, etc.) and corresponding effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the item selected by the selection effect means (as shown in FIG. 60, output of music corresponding to the selected item and output of video) An output control microcomputer 90200 or the like) that performs output, and the display means does not change the first effect even when the first effect of the plurality of types of effects is being executed. Corresponding items can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (e), even if the item corresponding to the music A is being executed, the item corresponding to the music A can be displayed as “return”. If the item corresponding to the second effect different from the first effect is selected in a state where the first effect is being executed, the corresponding effect executing means is the second An effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (h), when an item corresponding to a song B different from the song A is selected, the song B is reproduced from the beginning). When the item corresponding to the first effect is selected again while being executed, the state of the first effect being executed is taken over (for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (g)). In addition, when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the music A is played as it is).

  According to such a configuration, since the start timing of the movable body effect can be varied depending on whether or not the specific effect is being executed in the immediately preceding variable display, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, even when the selected effect is selected again, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  It should be noted that a variable display, a specific variable display (a variation display of an effect symbol by a normal variation pattern, a special reach variation pattern, etc.), and a plurality of items (for example, a plurality of types of variations corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player) When displaying the display of items corresponding to music) on the same display device (for example, effect display devices 9 and 909), display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player The display related to the variable display and the specific variable display is also performed. In addition, the specific display (for example, countdown notice display) different from the movable body display is the same display device (for example, display of a plurality of items corresponding to variable display, specific variable display, and a plurality of types of effects selectable by the player) When displaying on the effect display devices 9, 909), the display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player also performs variable display and specific variable display, Display related to the specific effect is also performed.

  Furthermore, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can improve the game entertainment and can prevent a decrease in the game entertainment even when the selected effect is selected again, a gaming machine that performs a game (for example, Display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects selectable by the player (for example, items corresponding to a plurality of types of music as shown in FIG. 60) Display control microcomputer 90200 and the like) and selection effect means capable of executing a selection effect for selecting any one of the plurality of items (items selected by a selection operation as shown in FIG. 60) Effect control microcomputer 90200 or the like) and corresponding effect execution means (FIG. 60) capable of executing effects corresponding to the item selected by the selection effect means. As shown, the display control microcomputer 90200 or the like that outputs music and video corresponding to the selected item is provided, and the display means is the first of the plurality of types of effects in the selection effect. Even in a state where one effect is being executed, an item corresponding to the first effect can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (e), an item corresponding to song A is being executed). Even so, the item corresponding to the music A can be displayed as “return”, etc.), and the corresponding effect executing means is a second different from the first effect in a state where the first effect is being executed. When an item corresponding to the effect is selected, the second effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (h), when an item corresponding to song B different from song A is selected). Plays song B from the beginning When the item corresponding to the first effect is selected again in a state where the first effect is being executed, the state of the first effect being executed is taken over (for example, As shown in FIG. 60 (g), when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the music A is played as it is). Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 34 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (bullet ball gaming machine) 901 viewed from the front. Here, a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of the gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, or the like.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape that is provided on the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. And the board 906).

  As shown in FIG. 34, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape. A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 903 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 902. Under the hitting ball supply tray 903, an extra ball receiving tray 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 903, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 905 for emitting hitting balls are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 906 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 907 is formed on the front surface of the game board 906 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 907, an effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 909 has a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition that is the first execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 9013). A display area (hereinafter referred to as a first variable display section 909a) for variably displaying an effect decoration pattern (first decoration pattern) (hereinafter also referred to as variation display or variation) and deriving and displaying a display result, and a second. A plurality of types of decorative designs (second decorative symbols) that can be distinguished from each other based on the establishment of the second starting condition, which is an execution condition (for example, that the hit ball has won the second starting winning opening 9014) is variable. It is easier for the player to visually recognize the display content than the display area (hereinafter referred to as the second variable display portion 909b) for displaying and displaying the display result, and the first variable display portion 909a and the second variable display portion 909b. Na Display region (hereinafter, referred to as performance symbol display unit 909c.) And there is. Note that easy to visually recognize the display content is, for example, that the size of the display area is large, or that the display content in the first variable display portion 909a and the second variable display portion 909b is always monochromatic. The display color may change. In this embodiment, identification information (hereinafter also referred to as effect symbols) is displayed and controlled in the three display areas of left, middle, and right in the effect symbol display unit 909c. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result means stopping and displaying the symbol. In this embodiment, one effect symbol display unit 909c is provided for two variable display portions (first variable display portion 909a and second variable display portion 909b), and two variable symbols are displayed in the effect symbol display portion 909c. Since an effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) variably displayed on the display unit is executed, the status of the decorative symbol (for example, whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed) ) Is difficult to grasp.

  A first special symbol display device (special symbol display device) 908a and a second special symbol display device 908b that variably display special symbols as identification information are provided on the top of the effect display device 909. In this embodiment, each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, for example. Has been. The first special symbol display unit 908a and the second special symbol display unit 908b are provided with a larger number of numbers such as 0 to 99 in order to make it difficult to grasp whether the stop symbol is a probability variation symbol or a non-probability variation symbol. It may be configured to variably display. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a may be referred to as a first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b may be referred to as a second special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Some of them may be different. As an example, the first special symbol type includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the second special symbol type is a character other than numbers 0 to 5 and the first special symbol. Different characters may be included.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 908a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the number of first reserved memory (the stored memory is also referred to as start memory or start winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol reservation storage display 9018a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 9018a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one. Also, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the number of reserved storage. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 9018b increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  The first variable display unit 909a performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 908a. In addition, the second variable display unit 909b performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable symbol display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 908b. Here, in this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 908a and the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 908b can be variably displayed at the same time.

  The first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b that perform variable display of decorative symbols are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display portion 909a is sometimes referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display portion 909b is sometimes referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative design and the second decorative design may be collectively referred to as a decorative design. Note that the type of the first decorative design and the type of the second decorative design may be the same (for example, both 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative design includes numbers 0 to 5 and characters other than the numbers, and the second decorative design is a character other than the numbers 0 to 5 and the first decorative design. Different characters may be included.

  On the display screen of the effect display device 909, the number of effective winning balls entered into the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the first reserved memory number, and the number of effective winning balls entered into the second starting winning opening 9014, that is, the second reserved memory number. There is an area (hereinafter referred to as symbol hold storage display unit 9018c) that displays the total number (the total number of hold storage). Thus, in this embodiment, by displaying the total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number on the symbol hold memory display unit 9018c that is relatively easy for the player to visually recognize, It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol hold memory display 9018a and the second special symbol hold memory display 9018b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs smaller than the symbol hold memory display unit 9018c, respectively. Although configured, in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, a display of another aspect may be used. As an example, each of the first special symbol reserved memory display 9018a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 9018b is composed of one display, and the display color is different according to the number of reserved memories or the display density is different. I will let you.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the total pending storage number that can be displayed, that is, the total pending storage number is 8. The symbol holding storage display unit 9018c increases the number of display areas to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Each time variable display of the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of display areas to be lit is reduced by one. Or among the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c, the number of areas displayed in a color determined in advance as the effective start winning is increased by one. Each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of areas displayed in the color determined as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number is set to 4. Therefore, when the first reserved memory number is 4, and a game ball wins the first start winning opening 9013, the win becomes an invalid start win that does not satisfy the first start condition. If the first reserved memory number is less than 4 and a game ball wins the first start winning opening 9013, the win becomes an effective start win (first effective start win) that satisfies the first start condition. Similarly, when the second reserved memory number is 4, and a game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014, the win becomes an invalid start win that does not satisfy the second start condition. When the second reserved memory number is less than 4, when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014, the win becomes an effective start win (second effective start win) that satisfies the second start condition. In this example, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the combined reserved memory number is set to 8, but these values are an example. . Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first start winning port 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back of the game board 906 and detected by the first start opening switch 9013a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 9013a, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  A gate 9032 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 909. The game ball that has passed through the gate 9032 is detected by the gate switch 9032a. An operation gate 9017 is provided below the gate 9032. The game ball that has passed through the operation gate 9017 is detected by the operation gate switch 9017a.

  Here, in this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the game ball passes through the operating gate 9017, and the operating gate switch On the condition that it is detected at 9017a, it is configured to shift to a big hit game. Therefore, when the player rests the game after the end of the big hit gaming state, it is possible to limit the control to the big hit gaming state during the rest of the player. In particular, in this embodiment, since the variation time of the second special symbol is as long as 15 minutes or 5 minutes as described later, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the player can There is a case where it takes a break. Even in such a case, even if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, it is possible to restrict the big hit game from progressing during the break, and the player's profit is impaired. Can be prevented. Although this embodiment shows a case where the operation gate 9017 is provided separately from the gate 9032, the gate 9032 and the operation gate 9017 may be configured as a common gate. Further, it is not always necessary to provide the operation gate 9017. When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game may be shifted to the big hit game after the symbol fixed display time has passed.

  Below the operation gate 9017, a special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 that forms a big winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 9020 includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, and a specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be opened by the solenoid 9021 in an advantageous state (a big hit gaming state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball won in the big winning opening is detected by the first count switch 9023a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Below the special variable winning ball device 9020, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 9022 for forming a special winning port 9024 for small hits and a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second start winning port 9014. As shown in FIG. 34, a special variable winning ball device 9022 is disposed on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 9015 is disposed adjacent to the right side thereof. Although details will be described later, the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and are formed as plate-like bottom surfaces that are formed as the bottom surfaces of the channels through which the game balls flow down. By moving the member back and forth in the front-rear direction, an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can win a special winning port 9024 or a second start winning port 9014 located below the bottom member and a game ball wins It is changed to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 9022 has the bottom member moved forward in the small hit gaming state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. From the closed state, the bottom member is moved backward to move backward, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening 9024 that becomes the winning area. In addition, the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, An opening control is performed to open the second start winning opening 9014 that becomes a winning area.

  In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are formed to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 34, the variable winning ball device 9015 is formed. The special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is slightly larger than the above. Further, as shown in FIG. 34, since the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are arranged adjacent to each other, the game area 907 is dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 9020. The game ball first falls onto the variable winning ball device 9015. At this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is moved backward and the second start winning port 9014 is in the open state, The game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 9022. On the other hand, if the second start winning opening 9014 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is moved backward to open the special winning opening 9024, the game ball wins the special winning opening 9024. Further, if the special winning opening 9024 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 and falls to the out opening 9026 as it is.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 9015 is arranged on the right side. When the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is formed so as to be gently inclined from the upper right to the lower left, and the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 9015 has a special variable winning. In this sense, the variable winning ball device 9015 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is provided on the downstream side, because the game ball flows toward the ball device 9022. It can be said that it is provided.

  In the special winning opening 9024, a switch (second count switch 9025a, see FIG. 38) capable of detecting a game ball won in the special winning opening 9024 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 9025a, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when a game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 9024 that is opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022, the number of winning balls is smaller than when the gaming ball wins a prize winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) through other prize winning openings such as the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening 9024 is in the open state, the player is in an advantageous state. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 9024 is in the closed state, the game balls cannot pass through (enter) the special winning opening 9024, and thus a prize ball cannot be obtained. It becomes disadvantageous for the person.

  Further, in the second start winning opening 9014, a second start opening switch 9014a capable of detecting a game ball won in the second start winning opening 9014 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 9014a, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 9013 and the second start winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  In this embodiment, the gate 9032, the operation gate 9017, the special variable winning ball device 9020 (large winning port), the variable winning ball device 9015 (second start winning port 9014), and the special variable winning ball device 9022 (special winning ball device). Since the winning opening 9024) is provided on the right side of the game area 907, when the player is in the big hit game or in the KT state to be described later, the player aims at the right side of the game area 907 (so-called right operation). Hitting operation). Therefore, in this embodiment, a detailed description is omitted. However, when the big hit game or the KT state is in effect, for example, the effect display device 909 displays “right-handed” or the like in the right direction. It is desirable to make a configuration so as to notify that it is during the right-handed operation period, for example, by performing an arrow display indicating “.”

  Below the effect display device 909, a normal symbol display 9010 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 9010 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. Note that the normal symbol display 9010 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99. Further, the normal symbol display 9010 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decoration lamp capable of alternately displaying “O” and “X”). It may be comprised.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 9014). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time there is a game ball passing through the gate 9032, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol holding storage display 9041 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  A decorative lamp 9025 blinkingly displayed during the game is provided around the left and right sides of the game area 907 of the game board 906, and an out port 9026 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 9027 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 907. A top frame lamp 9028a, a left frame lamp 9028b, and a right frame lamp 9028c provided on the front frame are provided on the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 907. In addition, a prize ball lamp 9051 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 9028b, and a ball cut lamp 9052 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut out is provided in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 9028c. Is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating a ball striking operation handle 905 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 907. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hit ball operation handle 905, a game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 907 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends the game area 907. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the big hit game ends or the previous variable display ends) The first start condition is satisfied), the first special symbol display 908a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the first variable display unit 909a changes the first decorative symbol. Display starts. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 9013. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the total number of reserved storage (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 9018c on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit. Increase by one.

  Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second start opening switch 9014a, it is in a state where the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the end of the big hit game or the previous variable display) Is completed and the second start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 908b, and the second decorative symbol is displayed on the second variable display unit 909b. The variable display starts. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 9014. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the total number of reserved memory (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved memory display unit 9018c on the condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit. Increase by one. However, even if the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, if the combined reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed in the symbol reserved memory display unit 9018c is increased by one.

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 909a are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the first special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls wins the big winning opening. One round in the big hit gaming state is from when the special variable winning ball device 9020 is released until a predetermined period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hitting balls wins a big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls are won in the big winning opening, or when a certain period of time elapses after the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 is opened, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, and 16 rounds). Note that a V winning area may be provided at the big winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on the condition that the hit ball has won the V winning area while the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 is opened. Note that the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In this embodiment, the types of big hits are 2R normal big hit, 2R positive big hit, 6R normal big hit, 6R positive big hit, and 16R positive big hit. For example, if 2R normal big hit or 2R positive big hit occurs, two round big hit games When a state is given and a 6R normal big hit or 6R probability variable big hit occurs, a six round big hit gaming state is given, and when a 16R probability big hit occurs, a 16 round big hit gaming state is given.

  When it is decided that the stop symbol at the time of the first special symbol display 908a at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, “7”, etc.) Has a higher probability of being a big hit than a low probability state (a low probability / non-KT state and a low probability / first KT state, which will be described later) have a higher probability of being a big hit. (State) is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined as the probability variation symbol and the probability transition state is entered, not only the probability that the first special symbol in the first special symbol indicator 908a becomes a jackpot symbol is increased, The probability that the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 908b becomes a big hit symbol is also increased. That is, not only the jackpot determination based on the first start prize but also the jackpot determination based on the second start prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

  Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 909b are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the second special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state.

  When the second special symbol display unit 908b determines that the stop symbol at the time of the fluctuation stoppage of the second special symbol is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol such as “7”). Has a higher probability of being a big hit than a low probability state (a low probability / non-KT state and a low probability / first KT state, which will be described later) have a higher probability of being a big hit. (State) is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be a probable variation symbol and shifts to a probable variation state, not only the probability that the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 908b becomes a jackpot symbol is increased, The probability that the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 908a becomes a big hit symbol is also increased. In other words, not only the jackpot determination based on the second start prize but also the jackpot determination based on the first start prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

  Further, when the second special symbol at the time of the stop becomes a small hit symbol, the game proceeds to the small hit gaming state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened until a certain time has passed so that a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. Thereby, although it is less than a big hit game state also in a small hit game state, it is set as the open aspect which a player can obtain a ball.

  In the probability variation state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example, , The odd number of 0 to 9) is higher than the low probability state.

  Here, the gaming state in this embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in this embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) that tends to be a small hit compared to the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When controlled, when controlled to a low probability and the first KT state (low probability / first KT state), and controlled to a high probability and the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) In some cases, the control is performed with high probability and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

  Of the KT states, the first KT state, as will be described later, is likely to cause a small hit, but the special variable winning ball device 9022 is likely to be in the open state. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 changes). In the KT state, the second KT state, as will be described later, has a short opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 9015, and when a small hit occurs, a game ball is placed in the downstream special variable winning ball device 9022. Easy to win.

  The probability variation state is a gaming state that tends to be a big hit than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is generated more than the low probability state. The gaming state is easy to play.

  Further, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is likely to occur compared to the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 9015 will be in the open state per ordinary figure is the same as the normal state, but when the second special symbol changes, Since the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected is shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of variations in the fixed time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. In addition, since the second special symbol variation is configured to be a small hit in a part when it does not become a big hit, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by causing the second special symbol to change, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

  Next, the transition of the gaming state in this embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming to the left of the game area 907. Therefore, in the normal state, a start winning is mainly generated at the first start winning opening 9013, and the first special symbol variation display is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, the state shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / first KT state. After that, when 100 variation display is finished without generating the big hit, the first KT state is ended and the normal state is changed. Further, for example, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / first KT state, and thereafter, the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / second KT state, and thereafter, the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the first KT state is terminated when the variable display of 100 times is uniformly terminated when the low probability / the first KT state is controlled. Absent. For example, it is configured to provide a plurality of jackpot types that trigger the low probability / first KT state, and the number of variable displays in which the first KT state continues after the jackpot game is different according to the jackpot type (for example, 20 times Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

  In this embodiment, when the player has moved to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player moves to the right of the game area 907. Aiming to launch the game ball (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning is mainly generated at the second starting winning opening 9014, and a variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, the state shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to a low probability / first KT state, and thereafter, after 100 variations display is finished without occurrence of a big hit, the first KT state ends and the normal state is entered. Also, for example, when a 2R probability variation big hit or 6R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / second KT state, and thereafter, the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  However, as will be described later, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R probability variation big hit is made even though the state is the non-KT state before the big hit starts, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, control is performed so as to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state. In other words, it is a case where a right hit is made due to the change display of the second special symbol in spite of being in the normal state, and a 16R probability variable big hit occurs. In such a case, the state shifts to the second KT state and a considerable number in the small hit game. If it is possible to obtain a prize ball of the KT state, the original game performance in the KT state is impaired. Therefore, even if the player hits the right side in the normal state without changing to the first KT state, the prize ball by the small hit game It is configured not to obtain much.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variation big hit is based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the second KT state is shifted only when the KT state is set before the big hit starts. In the case of the non-KT state before the big hit starts, the first KT state is shifted to. In other words, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), it is configured to perform a left-handed operation, and is configured mainly assuming that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. However, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is configured so that it is unconditionally shifted to the second KT state. It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, and there is a possibility that the original gaming property is impaired and gambling is unnecessarily increased. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variable big hit is based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the transition to the second KT state is made only when the KT state is before the big hit, Such a situation is prevented, and in the non-KT state, the player is prompted to perform a left-handed operation. Note that when a right hand is made in the non-KT state, a left sound operation may be prompted by outputting a warning sound.

  Further, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 909a are synchronized. Furthermore, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b is synchronized with the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 909b. Here, the synchronization means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 908a, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 909a. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display portion 909b.

  Furthermore, when the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, a decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that reminds the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 909a. When the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, a special decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that reminds the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display portion 909b.

  In the effect symbol display unit 909c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator 908a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the effect symbols are variably displayed in three display areas in the effect symbol display unit 909c. When the reach effect is performed, for example, the left and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed during variable display. Basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 908a, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is derived and displayed on the effect symbol display unit 909c (in the three display areas). The production design is finally stopped.) When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is an effect symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left Three production symbols with the middle right aligned). Hereinafter, such a design symbol is also referred to as a jackpot symbol.

  When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the effect symbols are variably displayed in three display areas in the effect symbol display unit 909c.

  When the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and at the same time the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. An effect corresponding to any one of the variable displays is executed.

  When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed alone, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finished, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finished. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display of the effect symbol is terminated, and the stop symbol of the effect symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is delayed. When the special symbol for which the variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the effect symbol ends.

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) for the effect symbols that have not been stopped yet when the effect symbols that have stopped are part of the jackpot symbol among the three effect symbols. ) Is performed, and all or some of the effect symbols are displayed in a synchronized manner while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol.

  For example, a decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display regions of the left, middle, and right display regions in the effect symbol display unit 909c. The display area in the middle is in a state where the variable display is still being performed, and the state in which all or part of the display area is synchronously displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, production The variable display is performed on all of the left, middle, and right display areas in the symbol display unit 909c, and the variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are aligned.

  In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance is performed with a lamp or sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the effect symbol display unit 909c are called reach effects. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the effect design) is displayed, or the background of the effect design display unit 909c (a background color or pattern different from the design and the character) Etc.) may be changed (for example, color).

  Next, FIG. 35 to FIG. 37 are diagrams showing a special variable winning ball apparatus 9022. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 will be described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. However, the variable winning prize is only slightly smaller than the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022. The structure of the ball device 9015 is the same as that of the special variable winning ball device 9022.

  As shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 includes a base plate portion 90101 having a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is fixedly supported on the game area 907 by fixing the base plate portion 90101 to the game area 907 with, for example, a screw. In a substantially central region of the base plate portion 90101, a special winning opening 9024 (second starting winning opening 9014 in the case of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015) that opens toward the front is formed, and the special winning opening in the base plate portion 90101 is formed. A slit-like accommodation hole 90102 that is long in the left-right direction is formed at a position above the opening 9024 to accommodate the bottom surface member 9023 on the back side (rear side) of the game area 907 when the bottom surface member 9023 moves backward. Has been. In this embodiment, the special prize opening 9024 is specifically formed slightly to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the base plate portion 90101, but may be left or right.

  The bottom surface member 9023 is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right flows down toward the left, and the accommodation hole 90102 is inclined downward to the left so as to follow the inclination of the bottom surface member 9023. It is formed to do. The bottom surface member 9023 can be moved back and forth between the forwardly moved state shown in FIG. 36 and the backwardly moved state shown in FIG. 37, and the bottom surface member 9023 is located on the back side (backward) of the base plate portion 90101. A drive device (not shown) for moving the vehicle forward and backward is disposed.

  35 to 37, on the front side of the base plate part 90101, a flow path forming base part 90112 protruding forward is formed, and on the upper part of the flow path forming base part 90112, the forward movement is performed. An upstream flow path portion 90113 that is continuous in the longitudinal direction of the bottom surface member 9023 with the upstream region 9023U that is the upper side end portion (right end portion) of the bottom surface member 9023 in the state, A downstream region 9023L which is a lower side end portion (left end portion) of the bottom surface member 9023 and a downstream flow path portion 90114 which is continuous with the bottom surface member 9023 and forms a flow path of the game ball together with the bottom surface member 9023 are formed. Yes.

  Further, the upper part of the flow path forming base part 90112 is recessed downward from the end part on the bottom surface member 9023 side of the upstream flow path part 90113 and the downstream flow path part 90114, and the special winning opening 9024 is left and right in front view. A guide channel portion 90115 for guiding the game ball dropped below the bottom surface member 9023 to the special winning opening 9024 is formed so as to surround from below.

  The upstream-side channel portion 90113 and the downstream-side channel portion 90114 are formed so as to incline to the left so that the game ball can flow down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide channel portion 90115 extends downward toward the special prize opening 9024 side, and is recessed at a position in front of the special prize opening 9024. In the recessed space at the bottom of the guide channel portion 90115, a triangular guide portion 90116 is provided for guiding the game ball backward toward the special prize opening 9024 side (the back side of the game area 907). ing.

  Furthermore, the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base portion 90112 is integrally formed with a covering portion 90117 that covers the upstream flow path portion 90113, the downstream flow path portion 90114, and the guide flow channel portion 90115 from the front. Has been. The covering portion 90117 covers the upstream flow passage portion 90113, the downstream flow passage portion 90114, and the guide flow passage portion 90115 from the front, so that the game balls flowing down these flow passage portions jump to the glass door frame 902 side. It has a function to prevent it. In this embodiment, the covering portion 90117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 90112, but may be fixed separately.

  In the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022, a flow of game balls connected in the left-right direction, including the upstream channel portion 90113, the bottom surface member 9023, and the downstream channel portion 90114, between the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117. A path F is formed. Here, in this embodiment, the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 are formed with a plurality of restricting pieces 90118 that reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F.

  In this embodiment, the restriction piece 90118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 90101 or protruding rearward from the covering portion 90117. When there is no restriction piece 90118, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball flowing down to the left meanders with the movement of the longitudinal component by interfering with Than delay. These restricting pieces 90118 are formed so as to be arranged at a predetermined interval in the flow direction of the game balls in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117. Further, the regulation piece 90118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom surface member 9023, and is set to a width dimension that allows a game ball to pass between adjacent ones. Yes. More specifically, in this embodiment, one restriction piece 90118 is formed in a portion of the covering portion 90117 that covers the upstream-side passage portion 90113 from the front, and the downstream-side passage portion of the covering portion 90117. One restriction piece 90118 is formed at a portion covering 90114 from the front. In addition, a total of five regulating pieces 90118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 are formed at the portion of the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 that covers the bottom surface member 9023. The number of such restriction pieces 90118 is not particularly limited. Further, in this embodiment, most of the restriction piece 90118 is covered by the covering portion 90117 from the front (player side).

  With the arrangement of the restriction pieces 90118 as described above, referring to FIG. 36, the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 (and the similarly configured variable winning ball apparatus 9015) of this embodiment attempts to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P flows down so as to meander on the flow path F. When the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P becomes the special winning port 9024 (or the second start winning port 9014). Without passing the prize, it passes basically through the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 (or variable winning ball apparatus 9015). On the other hand, referring to FIG. 37, when the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) in which the bottom member 9023 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P is guided to the flow path forming table 90112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 90115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow path portion 90115 and win a special winning opening 9024 (or the second start winning opening 9014).

  FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 9031. FIG. 38 also shows a payout control board 9037, an effect control board 9080, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 90560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. A game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 9055 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 9057. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built in the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 9056 and the RAM 9055, and the ROM 9054 may be external or built-in. Further, the I / O port unit 9057 may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 90560, the CPU 9056 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 9054. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 9031.

  Further, detection signals from the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are given to the game control microcomputer 90560. An input driver circuit 9058 is also mounted on the main board 9031 and controls a solenoid 9021 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 9020, a solenoid 90106 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 9022, and a solenoid 90206 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 9015. An output circuit 9059 that is driven in accordance with a command from the microcomputer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031, and is a system for resetting the game control microcomputer 90560 when the power is turned on. A main reset circuit (not shown) and an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer are also mounted on the main board 9031. Has been. Note that the main board 9031 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting a test signal to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by an effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077. The display control is performed on the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the effect symbol display unit 909c that variably displays the effect symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c.

  FIG. 39 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 39, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070, only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 9080 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 90200 including an effect control CPU 90201 and RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90201 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 90202 and the input port 90203. Further, the effect control CPU 90201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90209 to perform display control of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90202 on the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90202 passes the signal input from the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 9080 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 9031 is allowed to pass through the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the effect control board 9080 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). The unidirectional circuit 9074 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 39 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 9031 via the output port 90571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 9077 to the inside of the main board 9031 is restricted. That is, a signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (the game control microcomputer 90560 side). The output port 90571 is a part of the I / O port unit 9057 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 90571 (on the relay board 9077 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 90201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver substrate 9035 via the input / output port 90205. Further, the effect control CPU 90201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the input / output port 90204.

  In the lamp driver substrate 9035, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 90352 via the input / output driver 90351. The lamp driver 90352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 9028a, the left frame lamp 9028b, and the right frame lamp 9028c. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 9025 provided on the frame side. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a special winning award lamp 9024a is provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022, and the lamp driver 90352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to the special winning award lamp 9024a.

  In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input / output driver 90702. The voice synthesizing IC 90703 generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 90703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 90706, to the speaker 9027. The audio data ROM 90704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are communicated between the effect control CPU 90201, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070 (such as transmitting a response signal from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communication).

  The effect control CPU 90201 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among images displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like (including decorative symbols and effect symbols). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 90201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 90209. The VDP 90209 performs display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 90201.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 90209 that performs display control of the effect display device 909 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP 90209 has an address space independent from the effect control microcomputer 90200, and maps the VRAM to the address space. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. The VDP 90209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909.

  In this embodiment, an effect control board 9080, an audio output board 9070, and a lamp driver board 9035 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. It may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and a second circuit on which other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 9027, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with this production control board. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90200, but other boards (for example, the audio output board 9070 shown in FIG. It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 in the effect control board 9080 via the driver board 9035 or the like. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070 or the lamp driver board 9035, and the control means receives the command. Control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 for controlling the effect display device 909 as it is or as a simplified command, for example. May be. In addition, when two boards, the first effect control board and the second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 90560 is transmitted to the second effect control board, The command is transmitted as it is from the second effect control board to the first effect control board, or is transmitted after processing (for example, changing the command form or contents, simplifying, or selecting only necessary commands). You may comprise.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031. When the gaming machine is turned on and the input level of the reset terminal to which a reset signal is input becomes high, the gaming control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) determines whether the contents of the program are valid. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S901 is started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S903). Then, initialization of the internal device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are internal devices (internal peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S904). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is the interrupt address. This mode indicates

  Next, the CPU 9056 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S906). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 9056 executes normal initialization processing (steps S9010 to S9015).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing for the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S907). If it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 9056 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process. In this example, if “55H” is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (ON state), and if a value other than “55H” is set, it means that there is no backup (OFF state).

  If it is confirmed that there is a backup, the CPU 9056 performs a data check of the backup RAM area (parity check in this example) (step S908). In step S908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set as a pointer (step S9091), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9092). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S9091 and S9092, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before the power supply is stopped (such as a special symbol process flag), an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 9056 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 as a pointer (step S9093), and a control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 9080 according to the contents. Control is performed so that a recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery is transmitted (step S9094). Then, control goes to a step S9015.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). The entire area of the RAM 9055 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. The initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set as a pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S9012).

  By the processes in steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a winning ball flag, an out of ball flag, a payout stop flag, and the like are selectively processed according to the control state. An initial value is set in the flag for this.

  The CPU 9056 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 as a pointer (step S9013), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board to the sub board according to the contents. Processing is executed (step S9014). Examples of the initialization command include a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 909.

  In step S9015, the CPU 9056 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S9010 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S9017) and the initial value random number update process (step S9018) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S9016), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt permitted state is set. Setting is performed (step S9019). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a big hit determination random number generation counter). A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 90560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In a process for transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game device control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for jackpot determination is one round (a random number generation counter for jackpot determination, etc.) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value that can be taken, the initial value is set in the counter.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on state has been entered) is executed (step S9020). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 9056 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are input via the input driver circuit 9058. Then, the state is determined (switch process: step S9021).

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs display control processing for performing display control of the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, the first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, and the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b. It executes (step S9022). For the first special symbol display device 908a and the second special symbol display device 908b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display device is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S9032.

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a big hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S9024 and S9025).

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 ': Determines whether or not to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit and small hit determination)
(2) Random 2 ': Determines the type of jackpot, ie, 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 16R probability variation jackpot (for determining jackpot type)
(3) Random 5 ′: Determines the variation pattern of the special symbol (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 6 ': Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 7 ′: The initial value of random 1 ′ is determined (for determining the random 1 ′ initial value).
(6) Random 8 ′: The initial value of random 6 ′ is determined (for determining the random 6 ′ initial value).
In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 41, the game control microcomputer 90560 performs (1) big hit, small hit determination random number, (2) big hit type determination random number, and (4) normal symbol. A counter for generating a hit determination random number is incremented (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In order to enhance the game effect, random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (6) are also used. In this embodiment, a common random number (random 2 ′) is provided as a random number for determining the type of jackpot and a random number for determining the type of jackpot. However, different random numbers are provided. There may be.

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs the first special symbol process (step S9026A). In the first special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 908a and the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Next, the CPU 9056 performs the second special symbol process (step S9026B). In the second special symbol process, the second special symbol display unit 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 are controlled according to a second special symbol process flag for controlling the game in a predetermined order. Perform the appropriate processing. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Then, the CPU 9056 performs normal symbol process processing (step S9026C). In the normal symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 9010 and the variable winning ball device 9015 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs a hold storage process (step S9027a). In the pending storage process, the CPU 9056 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total pending stored number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number.

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved memories (effect control command control process: step S9028).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S9029).

  Further, the CPU 9056 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a. (Step S9030). Specifically, the payout control board 9037 according to the winning detection based on one of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a being turned on. The payout control command indicating the number of winning balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 9056 provides the output port with information regarding on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port. Output (step S9031: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 9056 sets the first special symbol display control data for effect display of the first special symbol in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data according to the value of the first special symbol process flag. In addition, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data Control processing is performed (step S9032). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 outputs a drive signal in step S9022 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby variably displaying the special symbols on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b. Execute.

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S9033). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 executes the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting a drive signal in step S9022 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer. Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S9034), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (excluding step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 908a and the second special symbol display unit 908b perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the CPU 9056 Control is performed so that a big hit does not occur simultaneously in the two displays.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table. FIG. 43A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 ′ is set. The jackpot determination table includes a non-probability change-time jackpot determination table used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high probability). Probability / second KT state)) is used in the probability change jackpot determination table. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 43 is set in the non-probable change big hit determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 43 is set in the probability change big hit determination table. . The numerical value described in FIG. 43A is a jackpot determination value.

  The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1 ′). The jackpot determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the jackpot determination values shown, it is decided to win a jackpot for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 43A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 43B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with random 1 ′ is set. In the small hit determination table, no determination value is set for the first special symbol, and a small hit determination value is set only for the second special symbol.

  The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the random number for random determination (random 1 ′). If it matches any one of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 43B indicates the probability (ratio) of being a small hit. In addition, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but whether to make the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 908b to be a small hit symbol? It also means deciding whether or not.

  In this embodiment, when it is decided not to make a big hit when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, all are unconditionally set off. Further, when it is decided not to make a big hit when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the big hit is determined by the small hit determination table of FIG.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 90131a stored in the ROM 9054. The jackpot type determination table 90131a, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on a random number (random 2 ′) for determining the jackpot type, the jackpot type is set to “2R normal jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine any one of “2R probability variable big hit”, “6R normal big hit”, “6R probability variable big hit”, or “16R probability big hit”.

  As shown in FIG. 44A, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, “16R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 20%, and “ “6R probability variable big hit” is determined, and “6R normal big hit” is determined with a probability of 35%. As shown in FIG. 44 (B), in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, “16R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 30% The “6R probability variation big hit” is determined, the “2R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 5%, and the “2R normal big hit” is determined with a probability of 35%.

  The “16R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to the 16-round jackpot gaming state and is shifted to the high probability / second KT state after the jackpot gaming state ends (in this embodiment, the game is shifted to the probability variation state. And the second KT state is also transferred). The probability variation state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs.

  However, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state before the big hit start, even if it becomes “16R probability variable big hit”, it is not in the second KT state. There is a case where a transition is made to the first KT state.

  The “6R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a six-round jackpot gaming state and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the jackpot gaming state ends (in this embodiment, the jackpot is shifted to the probability varying state. And the first KT state is also transferred). The probability variation state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs.

  The “6R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a six-round jackpot gaming state and is shifted to the first KT state only after the jackpot gaming state is ended. Then, after the transition to the first KT state, when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state is finished. Note that the first KT state is also ended when the next big hit occurs even before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times.

  The “2R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a two-round big hit gaming state, and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the positive changed big state is entered. And the first KT state is also transferred). The probability variation state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs.

  The “2R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and is shifted to the first KT state only after the jackpot gaming state is ended. Then, after the transition to the first KT state, when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state is finished. Note that the first KT state is also ended when the next big hit occurs even before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times.

  Note that the types of jackpot types are not limited to those shown in this embodiment. When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it may be configured to be able to determine 3R probability variation big hit to 7R probability variation big hit in addition to 16R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, and 2R normal big hit. It is done.

  45 to 47 are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns (variation times) of special symbols and decorative symbols used in this embodiment. EXT shown in FIGS. 45 to 47 is second byte data of an effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 45 to 47, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and the second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. 25 types of #A to # 18 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or A to 18) means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

  When executing the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, if the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. A variation pattern is determined by selection. As shown in FIG. 45 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined as one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

  When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the KT shown in FIG. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 45 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined as one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

  When the second special symbol variation display is executed, if the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT time shown in FIG. A variation pattern is determined by selection. As shown in FIG. 46C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns #A to # 02. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of place, the second variation pattern #A is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. In the case of determining the small hit, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the big hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of time of 5 minutes.

  In this embodiment, even when in the non-KT state, when the second special symbol variation display is executed and a small hit is made, there is a situation where a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game balls to the special prize opening 9024. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46C, even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the variation display execution frequency is lowered. By doing so, the occurrence frequency of the small hit is reduced, and the situation where the winning of the winning ball by the small hit is aimed at despite the non-KT state is prevented.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even if it is a big hit. By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent an act of unjustly aiming for a winning ball by winning a special winning opening 9024 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of small hit, so it is configured to have a shorter variation time than the case of big hit. Yes.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the low probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations after that. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 46 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns #B to # 04. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 46D, when it is determined that a small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation is a relatively long variation time of 7 seconds. Pattern # 03 (a variation pattern for preparing to open the second start winning opening) is determined. In this embodiment, as already described, in the case of being controlled to the first KT state, the special winning prize is actually increased by increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 although the frequency of small hits is increased. The special prize opening 9024 in the ball device 9022 is set so as to rarely win. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls have accumulated on the bottom members of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 9022 is controlled to be in the open state, a considerable number of game balls may win a special winning opening 9024. Therefore, in this embodiment, at the first change of the first KT state, by securing a change time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 before the shift to the first KT state. By allowing the special variable winning ball device 9022 to be in an open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member have fallen, This prevents a situation in which more than expected prize balls can be obtained in the first KT state.

  Also, in the case of executing the change display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state is executed, FIG. 46 (E). The second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the second to 99th variation shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 46 (E), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second to 99th variation of the low probability / first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #C to # 07 To be determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 46E, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 of the shortening fluctuation having a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds. May be determined. In this embodiment, if the small hit is determined as the second to 99th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state and the fluctuation display is executed based on the second fluctuation pattern # 07, the effect display device 909 is displayed. In the variation display of the effect symbols in, the effect of squeezing the symbols such as reaching or executing the slip effect is executed.

  In addition, after displaying the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation display of the 100th change (that is, the low probability / final change in the first KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 46 (F) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 46 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns #D to # 09. Is done.

  In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, the effect display device 909 displays a character display such as “During Chance Time”. As shown in FIG. 46 (F), when it is determined that a small hit is the 100th change in the low probability / first KT state, the end display for displaying characters such as “End of Chance Time!” On the effect display device 909 is performed. Is determined to be the second variation pattern # 08. In addition, as shown in FIG. 46 (F), when the big hit is determined as the 100th change of the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 909 ends the display of characters such as “End of Chance Time !!” After the display, the second variation pattern # 09 with a predetermined restoration display is determined.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, when the first special symbol variation display becomes a big hit during the KT state, the first variation pattern # 07 of the variation time of 1 minute is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case in which a big hit occurs immediately after the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state. You can no longer receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, in this embodiment, even in such a case, a sufficient time (in this example, 1 minute) that can generate a small hit several times is secured.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the high probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations after that. In this case, if the change display of the first change is executed, the second special symbol change pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first change shown in FIG. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 47 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns #E to # 12. Is done.

  As in the case of the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 47G, the second start winning prize is also obtained when the small probability is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state. There are cases where the variation pattern for preparing the mouth opening (second variation pattern # 10) is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 47 (G), in the case of determining a big hit as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability variation state (high probability state) ends. Second variation pattern # 12 including the effect is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 47 (G), the second variation pattern # 11 including the battle effect may be determined even when the small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state.

  Also, FIG. 47 (H) shows a case where a change display after the second change is executed after the big hit game based on the 6R probability change big hit or the 2R probability change big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state is executed. The second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability to be shown / first KT and the second and subsequent variations is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 47 (H), when the change display of the second special symbol is executed after the second change of the high probability / the first KT state, it is set to one of the second change patterns #F to # 15. It is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (H), as with the second to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. There is a case where the time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 13 with a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds. In addition, as shown in FIG. 47 (H), in the case of determining a big hit as the second and subsequent changes in the high probability / first KT state, it is suggested to indicate whether or not the probability variation state (high probability state) ends. A second variation pattern # 15 including a battle effect is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 47 (H), the second variation pattern # 14 including the battle effect may be determined even when the small hit is determined after the second variation in the high probability / first KT state. .

  In the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 47 (I) is selected. Variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 47 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns #G to # 18.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (I), when a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the shortening variation in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). There is a case where the second variation pattern # 16 of a shortened variation having a variation time of 1.5 seconds shorter than that when the variation display is executed is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 47 (I), in the case of determining the small hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation including the continuous effect suggesting whether the high probability / second KT state continues. The pattern # 17 may be determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 47 (I), in the case of determining the big hit in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability variation state (high probability state) ends after the continuous performance. The second variation pattern # 18 including the effect is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the variation pattern including the continuation effect and the battle effect is determined, the effect display device 909 executes the continuation effect and the battle effect in the variation display of the effect symbol. In the case of a big hit (16R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit), the effect of the victory mode is executed in the battle production, and in the case of a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) When the effect of defeat is executed, and when it is a small hit, the effect of draw is executed in the battle effect. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, and, for example, a defeat mode effect may be executed in the battle effect even when the number of rounds in the big hit game is small 2R probability variation big hit. .

  In addition, when determining the variation pattern of the shortening variation of the second variation patterns # 05, # 13, and # 16, for example, the variation pattern of the shortening variation is determined at a different rate depending on the number of reserved storage. Also good. For example, the variation pattern of the shortening variation may be determined at a higher rate as the number of reserved memories increases, so that the reserved memory can be quickly consumed and the operation rate can be increased.

  In the example shown in FIG. 46 and FIG. 47, the configuration is such that a shortening variation of 5 seconds is executed in the first KT state and a shorter shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the second KT state. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a short variation of 5 seconds may be executed in the low probability state, and a shorter short variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

  Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state. Among these, FIG. 48 (1) shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state, and FIG. 48 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special winning ball device 9015 in the second KT state. An opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is shown.

  First, an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 48 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol display 9010 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, Is determined to be displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, and the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010 when it is determined to be off. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48 (1), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol fixed time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol and the off symbol is 0.2 seconds. . When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 48 (1), after the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds elapses, the second start winning port opening processing time of 0.1 seconds elapses. Then, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second start winning port 9014.

  If a game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014 while the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the second special symbol variation display is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. When the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 48 (1), the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 48 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is short. Opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Accordingly, in the first KT state, although it is a state where a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball wins the special winning opening 9024 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation displays).

  In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 48 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 is finished, the next variable winning ball device 9015 can be opened because of the fluctuation of the next normal symbol. It is after at least 0.5 seconds have elapsed, which is a total of time 0.2 seconds, symbol determination time 0.2 seconds, and second start winning opening opening pretreatment time 0.1 seconds. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened.

  Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 48 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 9010, and the normal symbol is displayed. Is determined to be displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, and the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010 when it is determined to be off. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48 (2), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol fixed time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol and the off symbol is 0.2 seconds. . When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 48 (2), after the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds elapses, the second start winning opening releasing time 2.6 seconds elapses. Then, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second start winning port 9014.

  If a game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014 while the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the second special symbol variation display is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. When the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 48 (2), the special variable winning ball device 9022 is kept open for 0.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning hole 9024. It becomes.

  In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 is as extremely short as 0.5 seconds. In this embodiment, in the second KT state, at least 3.0 seconds (normal symbol variation time 0.2 seconds + design fixed time 0) as an interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is opened. A relatively long period of 2 seconds + 2.6 seconds before the second start winning opening opening process is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 48 (2), since the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 9015 is short and the interval period (closed period) is long, the downstream side compared to the first KT state. It is easy for a game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 9022, and it is easy to win a game ball to the special winning opening 9024.

  In this embodiment, the normal symbol process processing is executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) to execute the normal symbol variation display or to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015. (See step S9026C). The game control microcomputer 90560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit the normal figure in the normal symbol process of step S9026C, but the same probability (for example, 10%) regardless of the game state. ) To determine whether or not to hit the ordinary map. Specifically, regardless of whether the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or whether it is a big hit gaming state , It is determined whether or not to make a normal map with the same probability.

  In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the variation time of the normal symbol and the symbol determination time are the same in 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the second start winning opening releasing process is The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is made different by shortening to 0.1 second in the 1KT state and 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown. I can't. For example, the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 may be configured to have different closing periods (interval periods) by varying the variation time and the symbol determination time between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is closed can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. By doing so, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 may be varied. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 in the first KT state is shortened by any one of the methods described above, it is possible to suppress winning to the special winning opening 9024 in the first KT state. it can.

  Further, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning as shown in FIG. 48 (1). The ball device 9015 is controlled with a first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, a second opening pattern (for opening the variable winning ball device 9015 shown in FIG. 48 (2) for a short time ( You may comprise so that it may control by short open.

  Even in the first KT state, when the last change display in the low probability / first KT state is executed, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity that the variable winning ball device 9015 is long open when the left-handed notification is made after the low probability / first KT state ends.

  In addition, the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 may be configured to be short-opened during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is configured to have a high probability of opening in the low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. Then, it is possible not to win the variable winning ball device 9015, and it is possible to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low probability / non-KT state.

  FIGS. 49 and 50 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 90200. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 49, commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H), 8011 (H) to 8022 (H) correspond to the first variable display portion 909a or the second variable display portion corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol variably displayed in 909b. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Accordingly, when the production control microcomputer 90200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H), the first variable display unit 909a or the second variable display unit 909b is received. Control to start the variable display of the decorative pattern at.

  The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (outgoing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is to be lost. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 16R probability variation jackpot. . Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation big hit. . Command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 6R normal jackpot. . Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. . Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot. . The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

  Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display result designation received by the game control microcomputer 90560 immediately before the first variation pattern command. Since the command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the second decorative symbol, Although the display result designation command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the display result designation command for the first decorative symbol and the display result designation command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 90560 does not send a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 15R probability variation big hit / 6R probability variation big hit / 6R normal variation big hit / 2R positive variation big hit / 2R normal big hit / small hit / loss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the production control microcomputer 90200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

  Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first ornament symbol stop designation command)) for instructing stop of variable display of the first symbol. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second ornament symbol stop designation command)) for instructing to stop the variable display of the second symbol.

  Command BXXX (H) (X = any hexadecimal number) is an effect control command that is sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first big hit start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first big hit game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) that designates the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) that designates the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) that designates the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command) that specifies the start of a small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

  The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big prize opening) that designates display during the round during the big hit game. Note that the number of rounds displayed in “XX” is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big prize opening) that specifies display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

  Command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a big winning opening. Command B 401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won a first start winning opening 9013 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached four. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the second start winning opening 9014 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached four. In this embodiment, a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first effective start winning designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second effective start winning specified command. The first valid start winning designation command and the second valid start winning designation command are commands indicating that there has been a start winning.

  Command D000 (H) is an effect control command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a low probability / non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is high probability / first KT state. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is high probability / second KT state.

  The effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the effect control command described above from the game control microcomputer 90560 mounted on the main board 9031. Then, the display state of the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b and the display state of the effect symbol display unit 909c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the sound output board 9070. Note that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 are also transmitted from main board 9031 to effect control board 9080. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the big hit game and an effect control command indicating a game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process (step S9026A) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the first special symbol process, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 908a and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is executed.

  When the CPU 9056 performs the first special symbol process, the first start port switch 9013a for detecting that a game ball has won the first start winning port 9013 provided in the game board 906 is turned on. In other words, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the first start winning opening 9013 has occurred (step S90311), the first start opening switch passing process is executed (step S90312). Thereafter, the CPU 9056 performs any one of steps S90300 to S90307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes in steps S90300 to S90307 are as follows.
First special symbol normal process (step S90300): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 90560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the first big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S90301. The first big hit flag is reset when the big hit game ends.

  First variation pattern setting process (step S90301): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. The internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S90302.

  First display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S90303.

  First special symbol changing process (step S90303): This processing is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the first variation pattern setting process has elapsed (the variation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the production control microcomputer 90200 has Control to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command is performed, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S90304. The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the decoration symbol when it receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560.

  First special symbol stop process (step S90304): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first big hit flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90305. If the first big hit flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300. In this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control processing is displayed as the special symbol display. It is set in the output buffer for setting control data, and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S9022.

  First big winning opening opening pre-process (step S90305): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the first grand prize opening, control for opening the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls entered in the special variable winning ball device 9020) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. Also, the execution time of the first big prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90306 (6 in this example). The first big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round. However, when starting the first round, the first big winning opening opening pre-processing is also a process of starting a big hit game.

  First big prize opening opening process (step S90306): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball is won at the big winning opening and the first counting switch 9023a detects the gaming ball, control is performed to transmit a big winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied and there are still rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90307 (7 in this example).

  First big hit end processing (step S90307): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause display control microcomputer 90200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process (step S9026B) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the second special symbol process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is executed.

  When the CPU 9056 performs the second special symbol process, the second start port switch 9014a for detecting that a game ball has won the second start winning port 9014 provided in the game board 906 is turned on. In other words, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the second start winning opening 9014 has occurred (step S90321), the second start opening switch passing process is executed (step S90322). Note that if the “first” in the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 52 is read as “second”, the second start port switch passing process will be explained. Thereafter, the CPU 9056 performs any one of steps S90350 to S90360 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

The processes in steps S90350 to S90360 are as follows.
Second special symbol normal process (step S90350): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 90560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the second big hit flag is set. On the other hand, if not a big hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90351 (1 in this example). Note that the second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

  Second variation pattern setting process (step S90351): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S90352.

  Second display result designation command transmission process (step S90352): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S90353.

  Second special symbol changing process (step S90353): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the second variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S90351 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90200 has Control to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command is performed, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S90354. The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the decoration symbol when it receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560.

  Second special symbol stop process (step S90354): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90355. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90358. When neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when forced off), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S90350 (0 in this example). Update. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control processing in step S9022 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Pre-opening process for second big prize opening (step S90355): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the second big prize opening opening pre-processing, the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls entered in the special variable winning ball device 9020) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. Also, the execution time of the second big prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90356 (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Second big winning opening opening process (step S90356): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball is won at the big winning opening and the first counting switch 9023a detects the gaming ball, control is performed to transmit a big winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90355 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90357 (7 in this example).

  Second big hit end process (step S90357): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause display control microcomputer 90200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90350.

  Second small hit release pre-processing (step S90358): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hitting pre-processing, the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 9024) is initialized, and the solenoid 90106 is driven to control the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 to be opened. Also, the execution time of the second small hit release process is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S90359. The pre-opening process for the second small hit is also a process for starting the small hit game.

  Second small hit releasing process (step S90359): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming that the closing condition of the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is satisfied is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 of 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 48) elapses. In addition, when a game ball wins a special winning opening and the second count switch 9025a detects the gaming ball, control is performed to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90360 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Second small hit end processing (step S90360): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause display control microcomputer 90200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080. The effect control CPU 90201 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing a timer for determining the start interval of effect control, and the like (step S90701A). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90201 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S90702A). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 90201 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S90704). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 performs the first decorative symbol process (step S90705A). In the first decorative symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 909a is executed. . Further, the second decorative symbol process is performed (step S90705B). In the second decorative symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 909b is executed. . Further, effect symbol process processing for controlling the display state of the effect symbol display unit 909c is executed (step S90706). Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c is executed (step S90707). In addition, a random number update process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a random number such as a notice determination random number is executed (step S90708). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S90702A.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S90706) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90201 performs the process of S90700, and then performs one of S90800 to S90810 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Pre-reading process (S90700): This is a process for storing the reserved storage information (holding information) corresponding to the reserved storage information of the game control microcomputer 90560 and making the reserved storage information usable for the pre-reading effect. The pre-reading effect refers to the contents of the special symbol variable display based on the hold information by pre-reading the hold memory information before the turn of the special symbol change display (symbol change) based on the hold information is reached. This is a production technique such as making a prior notice in advance of how the special symbols will change in the future. For example, when the stored storage information indicates that it is a small hit or a big hit, a notice effect (refer to FIG. 55) called a hold continuous notification effect can be executed as a prefetch effect. Hereinafter, the hold storage information that is the target of the pre-reading effect is referred to as “target hold storage information”. After the prefetching process, the big hit related process (S90701) and the rush process (S90702) are executed, which will be described in detail later.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 90560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (S90801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (S90801): Control is performed so that a variation effect that is an effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is started. In response to the received variation pattern command, a variation production effect pattern is selected, and the production time timer that measures the production time to be executed is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the changing time effect processing (S90802).

  Production symbol variation processing (S90802): Controls the switching timing of each state constituting the production pattern and monitors whether or not the production time counted by the production time timer has ended. Then, based on the fact that the production time has ended or that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the value of the production control process flag corresponds to the production-time production stop process (S90803) in order to terminate the production at the time of fluctuation. Update to value.

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (S90803): Control is performed to stop the effect at the time of variation and display the effect result corresponding to the variation display result (stop symbol) of the special symbol. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S90804) or the variation pattern command reception wait process (S90800).

  Big hit display process (S90804): When a big hit occurs, display control such as a fanfare effect as an effect such as a big hit display for notifying the effect display device 909 of the occurrence of the big win is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S90805).

  In-round processing (S90805): Display control during the big hit round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (S90806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (S90807).

  Post-round processing (S90806): Display control between big hit rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S90805).

  Big hit end effect processing (S90807): In the effect display device 909, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800).

  Small hit display process (S90808): When a small hit occurs, display control such as a fanfare effect as an effect such as a small hit display for notifying the effect display device 909 of the occurrence of a small hit is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S90809).

  Small hit opening process (S90809): Various small effects are controlled while the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is open. For example, in the small hit game state, various effects are executed when a game ball is detected by the second count switch 9025a in the special winning opening 9024a. When the special variable winning ball device 9022 is closed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect process (S90810).

  Small hit end effect process (S90810): The effect display device 909 performs effect control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800).

  In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 909 is controlled by each of the above-described processes, the effect at the time of variation corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is started, and the effect result corresponding to the variation display result of the special symbol is obtained. Is displayed. The effect control CPU 90201 recognizes the specified change pattern and the display result for the change display to be executed based on the received change pattern command and the display result designation command, for example. Determine the result.

[Directing during a big hit]
Next, the effect during the big hit executed in this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, when the jackpot display result is derived, it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Various effects are executed during the big hit gaming state (also called the big hit state or the big hit state).

[On-hold rendition]
For example, there is a holding continuous production as a big hit production. The game control microcomputer 90560 is a random value for determining a big hit and a random number for determining a big hit type when a game ball enters a start winning area such as the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014. , And a random value for determining a variation pattern is extracted. Then, if the start condition that can start the variable display such as the condition that the variable display is not being executed or the condition that the jackpot is not being hit is satisfied at the time of starting winning, the variable display is executed based on the extracted random number value.

  On the other hand, information indicating the extracted random number value is stored in the RAM 9055 at the time of starting winning for the variable display in which the starting condition is not yet established even though the game ball has entered the starting winning area. Then, at the time of the start winning prize, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits to the effect control microcomputer 90200 a prefetch result notification command that can specify information indicating whether or not to make a big hit, information indicating a variation pattern, and the like. . The hold memory is read out from the old one each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, and the variable display is executed based on the read information of the hold memory.

  By receiving such a prefetching result notification command, the production control microcomputer 90200 becomes a jackpot or a specific variation pattern type until a variation display that becomes a big variation or a specific variation pattern type is executed. It is possible to execute a pre-reading effect that suggests whether or not to notify.

  Such a pre-reading effect may be executed from the time of the previous big hit state to the time when the fluctuation display becomes the next big hit state. In this embodiment, the prefetch effect that is executed in the previous big hit state is referred to as a reserved continuous effect. When there is a hold memory that is determined to be the big hit state next in the big hit state (so-called hold continuous case), the hold continuous effect of the success pattern is executed until the next big hit state. In addition, there is a case where a failure continuous holding effect is executed. Then, in a succession of renditions of a success pattern, a premium video that cannot be seen with a normal jackpot flows thereafter.

  In addition, there is a case where a hold memory that is in a small hit state is stored between a big hit state and a hold memory that has been determined to be the next big hit state. A case where there is such a hold continuous effect or a hold memory that is controlled to a small hit state during the hold continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 55 is an effect drawing showing effects executed during the big hit. The big hit effect is performed in the order of FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (f). FIG. 55A shows a screen of the effect display device 909 at the start of the big hit. When the gaming state is switched to the big hit state and the first round game is started, the image is switched to the video with the big hit. An image indicating the current number of rounds is displayed at the upper right of the screen of the effect display device 909, and a numerical symbol indicating at which effect symbol the big hit has been started is displayed at the lower right of the screen. In the upper left corner of the screen, a total winning image 90194 shows the winning balls acquired by winning a big hit. As shown in FIG. 55A, at the start of the big hit, a total acquired image 90194 of “0GET” indicating that the number of acquisition is 0 is displayed.

  When the round progresses from the state of FIG. 55 (a) and becomes 5R, the rendition effect is executed. When the reservation continuous effect is successful, a reservation continuous image 90195 made up of the characters “continuity change” indicating the reservation continuous effect as shown in FIG. 55B is displayed. Also, the big hit video is switched from the normal big hit video to a premium video that can be seen only during the reservation. At this time, a “450 GET” total acquired image 90194 indicating that the acquired number is 450 is displayed. Thereafter, the screen of FIG. 55C is displayed at the 16th round, which is the first big hit end round. As shown in FIG. 55 (c), a premium video flows and a total acquired image 90194 of “1550 GET” indicating that the acquired number is 1550 is displayed.

  When information related to the small hit is stored in the hold storage between the first big hit and the second big hit, a screen as shown in FIG. 55 (d) is displayed. In FIG. 55 (d), “+100” indicates that 100 game balls have been won by winning a game ball in the special winning opening 9024 of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in one small win. A first acquired image 90196 to be displayed is displayed. The first acquired image 90196 is displayed with a rainbow background in the center of the screen. Such an effect due to the small hit between the big hits is also referred to as an acquisition notification effect. In the lower right corner of the screen, a number “123”, which is a symbol indicating a small win, is displayed in a discrete manner. In the upper right corner of the screen, a character “17R” is displayed to indicate that one small win is counted as one round. In the upper left of the screen, a total acquired image 90194 of “1600 GET” indicating the total number of acquired game balls acquired with the first jackpot is displayed. In FIG. 55 (d), a series of premium videos continues from FIG. 55 (c).

  Next, the state when the second big hit starts after the end of the small hit state will be described with reference to FIG. At the beginning of the second jackpot, “18R” is added to the top right corner of the screen, counting the number of rounds and the first jackpot as one round, and then starting the next big jackpot round. Characters are displayed. Also, a symbol “7” indicating the current jackpot symbol is displayed at the lower right of the screen. In addition, a total acquired image 90194 of “1750 GET” indicating the total number of acquired game balls is displayed on the upper left of the screen. Also at this time, a series of premium video is continuously played.

  At the end of the second big hit, the screen is as shown in FIG. In the upper right corner of the screen, after the first jackpot round and the small jackpot are counted as one round, the characters “33R” are displayed, which is the total of the next jackpot round. Also, a symbol “7” indicating the current jackpot symbol is displayed at the lower right of the screen. Also, a total acquired image 90194 of “3200 GET” indicating the total number of acquired game balls is displayed on the upper left of the screen. Also at this time, a series of premium video is continuously played.

  As shown in FIG. 55, a premium video with a hold effect flows as a series of videos from the big hit state to the next big hit state. Such a premier video also flows when the small hit state is controlled during a specific period from the big hit state to the start of the next big hit state. In this way, since the presentation by the video is a series, it is possible to give the impression that the big hit continues even if the gaming state changes. Therefore, in the period from the big hit state to the next big hit state, when there is a pending storage that is determined to be controlled to a small hit state different from the big hit state, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that, after the first big hit, the deviation may be included until the next big hit, but even in this case, the premium video continues to flow.

[Direction during rush]
Next, the production during the rush will be described. In this embodiment, if the high probability / first KT state or the high probability / second KT state is reached after the big hit gaming state, the rush state is entered. In the rush state, in the high probability / first KT state, it is not possible to expect a ball to be obtained by a small hit. On the other hand, in the rush state of high probability / second KT state, a small hit is likely to occur, and a prize ball based on the winning of a game ball in the special winning opening 9024 is added as needed. Therefore, during the rush state of the probability / second KT state, it is a gaming state where the number of balls is likely to increase as compared to other gaming states.

  FIG. 56 is an effect drawing showing effects executed during rush. When the rush state is entered after the big hit gaming state is finished, a rushing screen as shown in FIG. 56 (a) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 56 (a), at the center of the screen of the effect display device 909, a downward arrow indicates that the current variation display is being executed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 9091, 9092, and 9093. Indicated by. In the upper right corner of the screen, a total acquired image 90194 indicating the total number of acquired balls that have been won by big hits and balls in rush is displayed. Further, on the right side of the screen, characters “RUSH” indicating that the rush state is currently being displayed. In the lower left of the screen, a hold display H for displaying the generated hold storage information is displayed corresponding to the number of the hold storage information.

  When the current fluctuation is a fluctuation that results in the small hit display result from the state of FIG. 56A, the display result is controlled to the small hit state as shown in FIG. 56B. A combination of even-numbered symbols “222” is displayed. In addition, the white even-numbered pattern of FIG.56 (b) is blue. In the lower right corner of the screen, the winning ball acquired during the small hit is displayed as a second acquired image 90197 of the characters “+100”.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (b), when the small hit state is achieved in the rush state, a second acquired image 90197 for notifying that the game ball has been won is displayed on the special variable winning ball device 9022. In this way, since it is clearly notified that the game ball has been acquired, it is easy to understand that the small hit state has been controlled, and it is possible to add momentum to the performance. Therefore, interest when controlled to the small hit state can be improved.

  Also, from the state of FIG. 56 (a), when the current fluctuation is a fluctuation that results in a small hit display result, and there is a hold memory that is controlled to the small hit state in the hold memory, FIG. The display screen is as shown in FIG. In FIG. 56C, a combination of even symbols “222” indicating that the display result is controlled to the small hit state is displayed. Up to this point, the process is the same as FIG. However, in the lower right corner of the screen, the winning ball acquired during the small hit is displayed as a third acquired image 90198 of the characters “GET”.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 (b) and 56 (c), in the small hit state, the second acquired image 90197 in the case where there is no hold storage determined to be controlled in the small hit state within the hold, The third acquired image 90198 in the case where there is a pending storage determined to be controlled to the small hit state is displayed in a different manner. In this way, it is possible to give a special feeling to the player when there is a holding memory determined to be controlled to the small hit state (when holding information is stored). Therefore, expectation can be given to the future gaming state.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 55 (d), 56 (b) and 56 (c), the first acquired image 90196 when it is controlled to the small hit state during the period from the big hit state to the next big hit state, The acquired images are displayed in different display modes in the second acquired image 90197 and the third acquired image 90198 in periods other than the above. In this way, the first acquired image 90196 in the small hit state during the reserved continuous production that can acquire the most gaming balls among these states is larger in the center of the screen than the acquired images in other states, Also displayed in rainbow colors. Thereby, a special feeling can be given when it is controlled to the small hit state between the big hits.

  Next, when the probability variation big hit is obtained from the state of FIG. 56 (a) (high probability / first KT state or high probability / second KT state), a screen as shown in FIG. 56 (d) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 56 (d), as a display result, an odd symbol combination of “777” indicating that the probability variation big hit state is controlled is displayed. Note that the odd-numbered symbols in FIG. 56 (d) are red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56 (e), the probability variation big hit is started, and an image corresponding to the probability variation big hit is played. Note that the probability variation big hit symbol may be different between the high probability / first KT state in which a small hitting cannot be achieved and the high probability / second KT state in which a small hit can be expected. For example, when the high probability / first KT state is set, an odd symbol “333” is displayed, and when the high probability / second KT state is set, a special feeling can be obtained by displaying “777”. Also, the color of the numbers may be different for the “3” symbol and the “7” symbol.

  When the normal big hit is obtained from the state of FIG. 56 (a) (low probability / first KT state), as shown in FIG. 56 (f), the symbol “END” indicating the end of the rush state is displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), the normal big hit is started, and an image corresponding to the normal big hit is played. In addition, after the end of the normal big hit, when the low probability / first KT state change is repeated 100 times, the non-KT state is controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the display result includes a small hit display result composed of a combination of blue symbols shown in FIG. 56 (b) and a probable big hit composed of a combination of red symbols shown in FIG. 56 (d). Display results. When the small hit display result is derived and displayed, the small hit state is controlled. When the probability variation big hit display result is derived and displayed, the big hit state is controlled. In this way, by changing the display result depending on whether it is a small hit display result or a big hit display result, the gaming state to be controlled can be easily shown.

  Further, when the small hit state is controlled during the rush state where a series of premium images are not flowing, the small hit display result including the combination of blue symbols shown in FIG. 56B is derived and displayed, and FIG. When the small hit state is controlled during the rush state after the series of premium images shown in d) has flowed, control is performed so that the loose eye is displayed at the lower right of the screen. In this way, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the target of the premium video is controlled to the small hit state, and the interest of the game is reduced.

  In FIG. 56 (g), a challenge effect in which the rush state continues in the middle of the video corresponding to the normal jackpot may be executed. The challenge effect is an effect that shows that it was a promising big hit in which the rush state continues in the appearance of a normal big hit. Specifically, after issuing the “END” symbol indicating the end of the rush state, the push button is pushed, and if the wall on the screen is opened by the push button operation, the rush state continues with a successful challenge. Even if the push button is operated, if the wall on the screen does not open, the challenge will fail and the end of the rush state will be confirmed.

[Big hit related processing]
Next, the jackpot related process executed during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the big hit related processing. The jackpot related process is executed in the effect control process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201). In the big hit related process, the effect control CPU 90201 executes the process related to the effect setting as shown in FIG. Hereinafter, specific description will be given based on the flowchart.

  In the big hit related process, first, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is a big hit start time (S90500). When the effect control CPU 90201 determines that it is the start of the big hit (Y in S90500), the inside of the reserved storage buffer is confirmed (S90501), and the process proceeds to S90502. On the other hand, if the effect control CPU 90201 determines that it is not the start of the big hit (N in S90500), the process ends.

  In S90502, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot holding storage. When it is determined that there is a big hit hold memory (Y in S90502), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not to execute the hold continuous effect, and sets the success pattern when executing the hold continuous effect ( S90503) and S90504 are entered.

  In step S90504, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not there is a small hit holding memory until the next big hit. If the CPU 90201 for effect control determines that there is a small-bonus storage until the next big hit (Y in S90504), it sets the symbol and the acquisition notification effect at the time of the big hit small hit (S90505), It is set to play the big hit video (S90506). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets other effects (S90507) and ends the process.

  In step S90504, if the effect control CPU 90201 determines that there is no small hit hold storage until the next big hit (N in S90504), the processing is set so as to play a series of big hit videos without performing the processing of S90505. (S90506). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets other effects (S90507) and ends the process. Here, in S90506, when there is a small hit between the big hits, in addition to the premium video as shown in FIG.

  In S90502, if it is determined that there is no big hit hold memory (N in S90502), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not to execute the hold continuous effect. The setting is made (S90508). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets so that the normal big hit video that is not a premium video ends when the big hit ends (S90509). Then, other effects are set (S90507), and the process ends.

  Instead of providing a success pattern and a failure pattern as the reserved continuous effects, the reserved continuous effects may be executed only in the case where there is a big hit reserved memory in S90502. In addition, the reserved rendition may be one in which a premium video flows from the start of the big hit, and it is not necessary to execute success or failure effects in the middle of the round.

  Moreover, in S90505, when setting the symbol and the acquisition notification effect at the time of the big hit, the flag for executing the acquisition notification effect may be set up. Then, the presence / absence effect may be executed by confirming the presence or absence of the flag at the start of the small hit fluctuation.

[Process during rush]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the rush process. The rush process is executed in the effect control process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201). In the rush process, the big hit symbol and the acquisition notification effect are determined in accordance with the result of the variable display to be executed when the rush time. Hereinafter, specific description will be given based on the flowchart.

  In the rush process, first, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in rush (S90520). If the CPU 90201 for effect control determines that the current gaming state is rushing (Y in S90520), the process proceeds to S90521. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not in rush (N in S90520), the effect control CPU 90201 sets other effects (S90525) and ends the process.

  In S90521, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. When it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a big hit (N in S90521), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the current fluctuation is a small hit (S90522). The process proceeds to S90522 (Y) and S90523. In S90522, if the CPU 90201 for effect control determines that the current fluctuation is not a small hit (N in S90522), it sets other effects (S90525) and ends the process. In S90523, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not there is a small hit hold memory in the hold memory (S90523). If the effect control CPU 90201 determines that there is a small hit hold memory in the hold memory (Y in S90523), it sets an acquisition notification effect when there is a small hit hold (S90529), and other effects. Is set (S90525), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no small hit hold storage in the hold storage (N in S90523), the effect control CPU 90201 sets an acquisition notification effect when there is no small hit hold (S90524), and other effects. Is set (S90525), and the process ends.

  In S90521, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is a big hit (Y in S90521), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is a probable big hit (S90526). When the effect control CPU 90201 determines that it is a probable big hit (Y in S90526), it sets a symbol for the probable big hit (S90527), sets other effects (S90525), and ends the process. On the other hand, if the CPU 90201 for effect control determines that it is not a probable big hit (N in S90526), it sets a symbol for a normal big hit (S90528), sets other effects (S90525), and ends the process. The effect at the time of rush as shown in FIG. 56 is determined by the content of the effect set by the process at the time of rush.

[Modified example of production during the big hit]
FIG. 59 is a timing chart showing processing during a big hit in the modified example. In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 are disposed side by side has been described. However, the above-described various processes may be executed by one variable winning ball apparatus 9015 without providing the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022.

  For example, when a so-called attacker which is one variable winning ball device 9015 is used, such an attacker repeatedly opens and closes from 1R to 16R in the first big hit section. Then, after the fluctuation section after the end of the big hit is completed, it is controlled to the small hit state, so that the attacker shifts to the small hit section in which the short opening and closing is repeated five times. The small hit section is indicated as 17R on the screen of the effect display device 909. Then, after the fluctuation section after the end of the small hitting section is completed, the attacker repeatedly controls opening and closing from 1R to 16R in the second big hit section by being controlled to the big hitting state again. The second big hit section is displayed as 18R to 33R on the screen of the effect display device 909. A series of big hit images are played from the first big hit section to the end of the second big hit section including the small hit section. As shown in FIG. 55, for the big hit video, the premium video may flow when triggered by the on-hold continuous effect, or the premium video may flow from the start of the first big hit.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, processing during a big hit effect in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, a case where music can be selected during a big hit will be described. In the second embodiment, during the big hit, a selection effect is performed in which any one of a plurality of songs is selected based on the player's operation. In the second embodiment, it is assumed that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided with a stick controller and a push button as operation means (not shown). For example, the stick controller may be attached to a predetermined position of the member forming the surplus ball receiving tray 904, and the push button may be attached to the upper surface of the member forming the hitting ball supply tray 903 or the like. When these operating means are operated, the player's operation is detected by a sensor provided inside, and the detection signal is transmitted to the effect control board 9080, and an effect based on the operation is executed. In addition, as a selection effect, any video may be selected from a plurality of types of video during a big hit, or any mode may be selected from a plurality of types of modes.

  FIG. 60 is an effect drawing showing effects performed during the big hit. The effect during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 60 (a), at the start of the big hit, a music selection screen is displayed. The music selection screen at the start of the big hit is displayed regardless of the player's operation. In the area on the left side of the display screen of the effect display device 909, items corresponding to the music pieces A to D are displayed. A first selection image 90170 corresponding to the A song, a second selection image 90171 corresponding to the B song, a third selection image 90172 corresponding to the C song, and a fourth selection image 90173 corresponding to the D song from above. They are displayed in order. In addition, a bordered display indicates that an item corresponding to the image is selected around the first selection image 90170.

  A video region 90175 is displayed on the right side of the first selection image 90170 to the fourth selection image 90173. In the video area 90175, videos corresponding to the music pieces A to D flow. At the start of the big hit, with the first selection image 90170 selected, the video corresponding to the music A flows from the specific part (for example, the rust portion where the music is heard) in the video area 90175. Also, at the start of the big hit, the music corresponding to the music A selected first is played from the specific part (rust portion). Here, the specific portion may be a portion other than the rust portion that is the story of the music. For example, it may be a main part of a music piece that is a rising part of the music but is different from the chorus part. Note that the video and sound corresponding to the music may be played from the beginning of the music.

  In addition, a selection operation image 90176 for prompting a music selection operation simulating a stick controller is displayed on the left side of the lower portion of the screen of the effect display device 909. In addition, a determination image 90177 that prompts a music determination operation imitating a push button is displayed at the bottom center of the screen. In addition, on the right side at the bottom of the screen, an image “7” is displayed that indicates which symbol is the current big hit. In addition, on the upper left side of the screen, the current round number is displayed, and on the upper right side of the screen, an image of a right-handed instruction that prompts the player to play the game on the right side is displayed.

  The state when the stick controller is operated from the state of FIG. 60A and the item corresponding to the music of B is selected will be described with reference to FIG. When the stick controller is operated from the state of FIG. 60A and an item corresponding to the music of B is selected, the second selection image 90171 is displayed in a framed state. In addition, the video corresponding to the music B flows from the specific portion (rust portion) in the video area 90175, and the music corresponding to the music B is played from the specific portion (rust portion).

  A case where the music piece A is determined from the state shown in FIG. 60B will be described with reference to FIG. In the music selection at the time of the jackpot start, when the music A is determined, the video corresponding to the music A is reproduced from the beginning in the video area 90175 moved to the center of the screen as the music determination screen at the time of the jackpot start. Music A is played from the beginning. The display of the selection operation image 90176 and the determination image 90177 is erased by the determination operation. Here, the music selection operation at the start of the big hit can be performed for a period from the start of the first round to the end of the second round. If the selection operation and the determination operation are not performed before the end of the second round, the video and sound corresponding to the initially set music A will flow from the end of the second round. Further, when two rounds are completed in a state where only the selection operation is performed and the determination operation is not performed, the video and sound of the music corresponding to the item selected by the selection operation are output.

  When the third round starts from the state of FIG. 60 (c), as shown in FIG. 60 (d), the video corresponding to the music A is continuously played in the video area 90175 at the center of the screen and the sound corresponding to the music A is output. Is done. At the start of the third round, the selection operation image 90176 is displayed again at the bottom of the screen. Then, when the player operates the stick controller, the music selection screen is displayed again as shown in FIG. Thus, the second music selection screen is displayed based on the player's operation. In the first music selection screen, the operation valid period is set from the start of the first round to the end of the second round, and in the second music selection screen, the operation valid period is the last from the start of the third round. It is set up to round (16 rounds). These periods may be set in any way, the selectable period may be three or more times, and may be set so that the selection operation cannot be performed during any round.

  In the music selection screen in FIG. 60 (e), a music whose character in the first selection image 90170 corresponding to the item of music A is “A” is compared with the music selection screen at the start of jackpot in FIG. 60 (a). The character shown has been changed to a “return” character. Further, the currently selected “returned” first selected image 90170 is displayed with a border. Also, from the state of FIG. 60 (d), the video and sound corresponding to the music piece A continue to flow as they are. In addition, a determination image 90177 is newly displayed. From this state, when the stick controller is operated and an item corresponding to the music of B is selected, the second selection image 90171 is displayed in a framed state as shown in FIG. Also, a video corresponding to the music B flows from the rust portion in the video area 90175. However, even when such a selection operation is performed, the sound of the music piece A is continuously output.

  When the music piece A is selected from the state of FIG. 60F, the state is as shown in FIG. In FIG. 60 (g), since the item of music A corresponding to the first selection image 90170 indicated by “Return” in FIG. 60 (f) is selected, the video corresponding to A is continuously reproduced in the video area 90175. . In addition, the sound of the music A is continuously played as it is. On the other hand, when the music B is selected from the state of FIG. 60 (f), the result is as shown in FIG. 60 (h). In FIG. 60H, since the item of the music B corresponding to the second selection image 90171 indicated by “B” in FIG. 60F is selected, the video corresponding to B is reproduced from the beginning in the video area 90175. . Also, the sound of the music B is reproduced from the beginning.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, at the start of the big hit, items corresponding to a plurality of types of music are displayed. And the player can change the item selected by selection operation, as shown in FIG.60 (b). In addition, the selection operation outputs music or video corresponding to the selected item. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (e), even if the item corresponding to the music A is being executed, the item corresponding to the music A can be displayed as “return”. In such a situation, as shown in FIG. 60 (g), when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the sound of the music A is continuously played as it is. As shown in FIG. 60 (h), when an item corresponding to the music B different from the music A is selected, the music B is reproduced from the beginning.

  In this way, it is possible to check what other selection items exist while playing the music corresponding to the music A. Even if the song A is decided again, the song A is not reproduced from the beginning and continues to flow from the middle. Therefore, even when the selected song is selected again, the interest of the game is reduced. Can be prevented. More specifically, if the already selected music is selected again, it may be troublesome if the music is reproduced from the beginning, and the interest may be reduced. However, even if the selected music piece is selected again by the processing as described above, it is possible to prevent the music piece from being reproduced from the beginning, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 60, a selection effect for selecting an item can be executed during the big hit state. Therefore, even when the selected music piece is selected again, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game during the big hit state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 60 (a), the music selection effect for selecting a music is a selection effect at the start of a round that is executed regardless of the player's operation at the start of a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 60 (d). In addition, a selection effect that is executed based on the player's operation when three rounds are disclosed is included. In this way, since there are a plurality of execution timings of the selection effect in the big hit state, the music selection is not selected in the first selection effect but according to the preference of the player such as selecting the music in the second selection effect. Selection effects can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the first selection effect at the start of the round is set from the start of the first round to the end of the second round, and the second selection effect at the start of the third round is at the start of the third round. To the final round. Therefore, by extending the period during which the second selection effect that is executed based on the player's operation can be performed, it is possible to deal with various types of players, such as the first selection operation not being possible.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 60, in the music that can be played back, as shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, in the selection effect at the start of the round, the items are based on the player's operation. When changed, the music to be played changes according to the change of the item. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 60 (e) and 60 (f), in the selection effect at the start of the third round, even if the item is changed based on the player's operation, It does not change. In this way, since the music is not frequently switched, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced by frequently switching the music.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 60E, in the selection effect at the start of the third round, the display of the item corresponding to the currently executed music is different from the display of “A” of the selection effect at the start of the round. Display with "Back". In this way, it is possible to easily show the player which music is currently being played.

  In addition, you may perform a reservation continuous effect about the above-mentioned selection effect. For example, it is assumed that a reserved continuous effect can be executed at any of a plurality of timings during a round. Then, as one of the plurality of timings, the hold continuous effect may be executed at a timing at which one of the plurality of items at the start of the round is selected. If it does in this way, a player can be surprised in the first selection production which selects music at the time of a jackpot start, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  In addition, when there is no player determination operation until the end of the second round, the hold continuous effect may be executed at the timing when the effect control microcomputer 90200 receives the command at the end of the second round. . Further, in the second selection effect at the start of the third round, instead of the selection effect at the time of starting the big hit, the hold continuous effect may be executed at the timing operated by the player. If the player does not perform a selection operation from the selection effect at the start of the third round to the final round, the holding continuous effect may be executed at the timing after the period during which the selection effect can be executed. Good.

  Further, regarding the big hit state as the advantageous state, a normal big hit as the first advantageous state and a probabilistic big hit as the second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state may be provided. And you may perform the probability change promotion effect which is promoted to the probability change big hit during the normal big hit. For example, it is assumed that the probability variation promotion effect can be executed at any of a plurality of timings during the round. Then, as one timing among the plurality of timings, the probable promotion effect may be executed at a timing at which one of the plurality of items at the start of the round is selected. If it does in this way, a player can be surprised in the selection production which selects music at the time of a big hit, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  In the case of the probable promotion effect, the execution timing may be determined at the start of the big hit. Then, the execution timing of the probable change promotion effect may have a plurality of timings at the time of selection of the music, the result of the incline effect of the fixed probabilistic promotion effect of 11R to 13R, and the end time (after the end of 16R). Good. If it is determined at the time of selection of music by a predetermined random number lottery from among these three patterns, the probable promotion effect may be executed in the selection effect of selecting music at the start of jackpot.

  Further, a plurality of big hits with different rounds may be provided, and this may be applied to a round promotion effect in which a big hit with a small number of rounds is promoted to a big hit with a large number of rounds.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the big hit music selection process. The big hit music selection process is executed in the effect control process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201). In the big hit time music selection process, when it is a big hit time, the process for the effect shown in FIG. 60 is executed. Hereinafter, specific description will be given based on the flowchart.

  In the big hit music selection process, first, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the current round is a period of 1R to 2R (S90601). When it is determined that the current round is the period from 1R to 2R (Y in S90601), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether the initial music determination flag is set (S90602). When the initial music determination flag is set (Y in S90602), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

  In S90602, when the initial music determination flag is not set (N in S90602), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is a music change period (S90603) and determines that it is a music change period. In this case (Y in S90603), it is determined whether or not there is a selection operation (S90604). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the music change period (N in S90603), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

  In S90604, when it is determined that there is a selection operation (Y in S90604), the effect control CPU 90201 reproduces the video and the music corresponding to the music from the chorus in accordance with the music selection (S90605). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no selection operation (N in S90604), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

  In S90606 after S90605, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not there is a determination operation (S90606). When it is determined that there is a determination operation (Y in S90606), the effect control CPU 90201 plays the video and the music corresponding to the determined music from the beginning (S90607). Next, an initial music determination flag is set (S90608), various data are stored in the storage area (S90609), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no determination operation (N in S90606), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

  In step S90601, if it is determined that the current round is not in the period of 1R to 2R, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the final music determination flag is set (S90610). When the final music determination flag is set (Y in S90610), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the final music determination flag is not set (N in S90610), the effect control CPU 90201 displays a music change screen (S90611). Next, it is determined whether a screen change flag is set (S90612).

  In S90612, when it is determined that the screen change flag is not set (N in S90612), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether there is a change operation (S90613). When it is determined that there is no change operation (N in S90613), the effect control CPU 90201 plays the video and music corresponding to the initial music as they are (S90616), and stores various data in the storage area (S90609). The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a change operation (Y in S90613), the effect control CPU 90201 sets a screen flag (S90614) and displays a music selection screen in which the initial music is set to “return” (S90615). , The process proceeds to S90617. In S90612, if the effect control CPU 90201 determines that the screen change flag is set (Y in S90612), the process proceeds to S90617 without performing the processes from S90613 to S90615.

  In step S90617, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether it is a music change period. If the CPU 90201 for effect control determines that it is the music change period (Y in S90617), it determines whether there is a selection operation (S90618). In S90617, if it is determined that it is not the music change period (N in S90617), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process. When it is determined that there is a selection operation (Y in S90618), the effect control CPU 90201 plays the video corresponding to the selected music from the chorus and plays the initial music as it is (S90619). Then, the process proceeds to S90620. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no selection operation (N in S90618), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

  In S90620, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not there is a determination operation. When it is determined that there is a determination operation (Y in S90620), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the initial music is determined (S90621). In S90620, when it is determined that there is no determination operation (N in S90620), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process. If the initial music is determined in S90621 (Y in S90621), the video corresponding to the initial music is played continuously and the initial music is played as it is (S90622). Next, a final music determination flag is set (S90624), various data are stored in the storage area (S90609), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the effect control CPU 90201 is not determined as the initial music (N in S90621), the video corresponding to the changed music is played from the beginning and the changed music is played from the beginning (S90623). Next, a final music determination flag is set (S90624), various data are stored in the storage area (S90609), and the process ends.

[Modification of music selection control]
Next, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, a modification example of selection control of music to be reproduced during a game such as a big hit music will be described. In this modification, a music selection control process that enables selection of music to be played during a game according to a player's operation (action) when a predetermined menu screen is displayed will be described. The music selection control process is executed by the effect control CPU 90201.

[Menu screen structure]
The menu screen is, for example, various settings that can be selected by the player on the effect display device 909 at a specific timing such as a customer waiting demonstration display (abbreviation of customer waiting demonstration display) and the start of a big game state. It is a display screen which presents an item with an option form (menu form) image. The customer waiting demonstration display refers to displaying a predetermined image as a demonstration display other than the image displayed during the game on the effect display device 909 in a state where the game has not been executed for a predetermined period (customer waiting state). The menu screen includes a main menu screen and a sub menu screen. The main menu screen is a screen that displays an upper menu image that can display main setting items in a list format. The submenu screen is a screen that displays the detailed items of the setting items that have been selected and determined in response to selection or determination of any of the setting items displayed on the main menu screen.

  On the main menu screen in the menu screen, icon images (hereinafter referred to as icons) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of setting items are displayed side by side in the vertical direction. The plural types of setting items include music selection settings for setting music to be played during a game. On the main menu screen, as the icon image corresponding to the music selection setting, a music image that is an icon image that can specify information related to the music is displayed.

  On the main menu screen, a selectable display in which an icon corresponding to one selectable setting item among a plurality of types of setting items is highlighted (high luminance display) is displayed. When the stick controller that can be operated in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction is tilted forward, the selectable icon is switched upward, and the stick controller is tilted backward. In response, the icon that can be selected is switched downward. When the push button is operated, the display screen is switched from the main menu screen to a submenu screen corresponding to a setting item corresponding to an icon that can be selected.

[Composition of music selection screen]
FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating a control example of music selection control executed when a music is selected and determined using a music selection screen displayed as a submenu screen.

  FIG. 62A shows a music selection screen display example that can be displayed on the effect display device 909. FIG. 62B shows a circulating image of the music image on the music selection screen. FIG. 62C shows music image scroll speed setting data. FIG. 62D shows music image scroll mode setting data. FIG. 62E shows scroll mode effect pattern data of a music image.

  When the music selection setting is selected and determined on the main menu screen according to the player's operation, a music selection screen as shown in FIG. 62 (A) is displayed on the effect display device 909 as a submenu screen. On the music selection screen, music images corresponding to a plurality of types (for example, six types) of music as shown in FIG. 62B can be displayed as selectable music images 9096 or non-selectable music images 9097. Music images corresponding to a plurality of types of music can be scroll-displayed in the left direction or the right direction in accordance with the circulation order indicated by the arrows in the figure. The music image is an icon-shaped image on which information (hereinafter referred to as music information) relating to music such as a music name is shown. In the scroll display of the music image, the music image moves in the left direction or the right direction as shown by the arrow in FIG. 62A in response to the stick controller 9031A being operated in the left direction or the right direction. Is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 62B, the music image displayed on the music selection screen includes a selectable music image 9096 corresponding to the selectable music that can be selected for playback, and a music image for playback. A non-selectable music image 9097 corresponding to a non-selectable music that cannot be selected yet is included. The selectable music image 9096 and the non-selectable music image 9097 are displayed separately based on the following conditions. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned on, predetermined music (for example, first music, second music) is initially set as a selectable music, and other music (for example, third music to sixth music) is selected. Initially set as impossible music. Then, every time a specific music addition condition is satisfied, control for adding and increasing selectable music is executed by the effect control CPU 90201. Thereby, the non-selectable music image 9097 can be changed to a selectable music image 9096 every time the music addition condition is satisfied.

  The specific music addition condition is, for example, a predetermined number of times (for example, the effect control CPU 90201 counts the number of times of variable display) of the number of times of special symbol variable display executed since the power is turned on the day (for example). For example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, etc.).

  As shown in FIG. 62A, on the music selection screen, a selectable music image 9096 and a non-selectable music image 9097 can be displayed together. Thereby, the interest of the player regarding the effect of reproducing the music can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The selectable music image 9096 is displayed as an icon image in a display form in which an image such as music information is indicated by a color image. On the other hand, the non-selectable music image 9097 is displayed as an icon image in a display mode in which an image such as music information is displayed as a gray image (monochrome image using gray or the like). In FIG. 62A, in order to distinguish the selectable music image 9096 of the color image from the nonselectable music image 9097 of the gray image, the non-selectable music image 9097 is shown by hatching. As described above, the selectable music image 9096 and the non-selectable music image 9097 are displayed in different display modes, so that it is visually determined which music can be selected (reproduced) from among a plurality of types of music. It is easily distinguishable.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (A), a selection area 9098 is provided as an area in which the music image to be selected can be retained and displayed (stopped display) at the center of the music selection screen. In the music selection screen, one of the selectable music images 9096 is displayed in a staying manner (stopped display) in a display mode in which all the images are displayed in the selection area 9098. In the music selection screen, the non-selectable music image 9097 is not staying displayed (stopped) in the selection area 9098.

[Scroll display mode on the music selection screen]
When the stick controller is tilted once in the left direction, the music image is scrolled and displayed in the left direction in accordance with the operation. On the other hand, when the stick controller is tilted once in the right direction, the music image is scrolled and displayed in the right direction according to the operation. In the scroll display in either the left direction or the right direction, the selectable music image 9096 displayed in the selection area 9098 before the scroll display is displayed in accordance with the circulation order of the music images in accordance with one operation. After the scroll display, the music image is changed to a new selectable music image 9096. When such scroll display is performed, the non-selectable music image 9097 is scroll-displayed according to the circulation order of the music image, but after being temporarily displayed on the selection area 9098 (display that temporarily remains). , Display to move.

  As described below, the scroll display according to the operation of the stick controller is performed when the music image in the next circulation order in the circulation order in the scroll direction is the selectable music image 9096 and in the non-selectable music image 9097. It is executed in a different scroll display mode from a certain time.

  In the scroll display of the music image, the music image in the next circulation order in the circulation order in the scroll display direction of the selectable music image 9096 that has been staying displayed in the selection area 9098 before the operation can be selected. In some cases, the selectable music image 9096 of the next circulation order is newly displayed in the selection area 9098 after scroll display, so that the selectable music image 9096 displayed in the selection area 9098 is changed. Is done.

  That is, when the music image in the first circulation order is the selectable music image 9096, the selectable music image 9096 is newly displayed in the selection area 9098 after scroll display. As a specific example, in the case where scroll display is performed in the left direction, the music image corresponding to the first music that has been staying displayed in the selection area 9098 before the scroll display is the selectable music image 9096, which is shown in FIG. As described above, when the music image corresponding to the second music in the next circulation order of the first music is the selectable music image 9096, the selectable music image 9096 corresponding to the second music is newly selected after the scroll display. The stay is displayed at 9098.

  On the other hand, in the scroll display, the music image in the next circulation order in the circulation order in the scroll direction of the selectable music image 9096 that has been displayed in the selection area 9098 before the operation is the non-selectable music image 9097. In such a case, after the first non-selectable music image 9097 in the cyclic order is displayed once in the selection area 9098 (display that temporarily stops), the next display is performed by scroll display regardless of the player's action. The selectable music image 9096 corresponding to the next or subsequent order of the non-selectable music image 9097 in the circulation order is newly displayed in the selection area 9098 so that the selectable music image is displayed in the selection area 9098. 9096 is changed.

  That is, when the music image in the next circulation order is the non-selectable music image 9097, after the scroll display, the non-selectable music image 9097 in the cyclic order including the non-selectable music image 9097 is displayed. A display that passes through the selection area 9098 while being temporarily displayed on the selection area 9098 is displayed, and a selectable music image 9096 in the subsequent circulation order is newly displayed in the selection area 9098, whereby the selection area 9098 is displayed. The selectable music image 9096 that is staying displayed is changed. As a specific example, in the case of scrolling in the right direction, the music image corresponding to the first music that is staying displayed in the selection area 9098 before the scroll display is a selectable music image 9096, which is shown in FIG. Thus, the music images corresponding to the sixth music, the fifth music, and the fourth music in the next circulation order of the first music are the non-selectable music images 9097, and the third music in the next circulation order is the third music. When the music image corresponding to the music is the selectable music image 9096, the unselectable music image 9097 corresponding to each of the sixth music, the fifth music, and the fourth music is displayed on the selection area 9098 in the scroll display. A display that passes over the selection area 9098 while being temporarily displayed (display that stays temporarily) is displayed, and after scrolling display, selection corresponding to the third music is possible Song image 9096 is retained displayed to the newly selected region 9098.

  As described above, on the music selection screen, the selectable music image 9096 that stays in the selection area 9098 is displayed as the selectable image corresponding to the next order by scroll display according to one operation by the player. It can be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (A), in the areas on the left and right sides of the selection area 9098 on the music selection screen, the music image in the circulation order immediately before the selectable music image 9096 stopped and displayed in the selection area 9098; Each of the music images in the next circulation order is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which a part of the image is displayed. Thereby, the selectable music image 9096 has a case where all the images are stopped and a part of the images are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the non-selectable music image 9097 does not always stop and display all of the image, but may stop and display a part of the image. With respect to the non-selectable music image 9097, a part of the image is stopped and displayed, so that it is possible to recognize that there is a non-selectable image, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Scroll display setting on the music selection screen]
The scroll display on the music selection screen is based on the scroll speed setting data in FIG. 62 (C), the scroll mode setting data in FIG. 62 (D), and the scroll mode effect pattern data in FIG. 62 (E). (Production pattern) is set and executed.

  FIG. 62 (C) shows scroll speed setting data used for setting the scroll speed when scroll display on the music selection screen is executed. As shown in FIG. 62 (C), when scroll display is executed on the music selection screen, the scroll speed is set as follows.

  A selectable music image 9096 and a selectable music image 9096, such as between the first music image and the second music image in FIG. 62B and between the second music image and the third music image. In the scroll display between each other, the first speed V1 is set as the scroll speed. A non-selectable music image 9097 and a non-selectable music image 9097, such as between the fourth music image and the fifth music image in FIG. 62B and between the fifth music image and the sixth music image. Scroll display between and the second speed V2 is set as the scroll speed. In the scroll display between the selectable music image 9096 and the non-selectable music image 9097, such as between the first music image and the sixth music image in FIG. 62 (B), the second speed V2 is the scroll speed. Set as As shown in FIG. 62C, the second speed V2 is higher than the first speed V1.

  As described above, with regard to the scroll display on the music selection screen, the scroll speed differs between selectable music images and between non-selectable music images. Thereby, the effect pattern of the effect using scroll display comes to be varied, and the interest of the game can be improved. Regarding the speed of the scroll display, the second speed V2 between the non-selectable music images is higher than the first speed V1 between the selectable music images. This makes it possible to reduce the period during which the non-selectable music image 9097 is displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  FIG. 62 (D) shows scroll mode setting data used when setting the scroll mode when executing scroll display on the music selection screen. The scroll mode is an effect pattern mode for scroll display. The scroll mode includes a low-speed scroll mode and a high-speed scroll mode.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (D), when the selection area 9098 is the reference position and the next cyclic order of scrolling is the selectable music image 9096, the low-speed scroll mode is selected. For example, when the first music image that is the selectable music image 9096 is displayed in the selection area 9098 and scrolls to the left, the second circulation image is the second music image that is the selectable music image 9096. In some cases, the slow scroll mode is selected. On the other hand, when the selection area 9098 is the reference position and the next cyclic order of scrolling is the unselectable music image 9097, the high speed scroll mode is selected. For example, when the first music image that is the selectable music image 9096 is displayed in the selection area 9098 while scrolling to the right, the sixth music image whose next circulation order is the non-selectable music image 9097 is displayed. When this is the fast scroll mode is selected.

  FIG. 62E shows effect pattern data of scroll display for each scroll mode. In the low-speed scroll mode, the music image is moved at the first speed V1, and the scroll display is executed in an effect pattern in which the selectable music image 9096 of the next circulation order is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098. For example, in the case where the first music image that is the selectable music image 9096 is displayed in the selection area 9098 and scrolls to the left, the music image is moved at the first speed V1 in the low-speed scroll mode. Scroll display is performed in an effect pattern in which the second music image that is the selectable music image 9096 of the next circulation order is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098.

  In the high-speed scroll mode, the music image is moved at the second speed V2, and a skip display is displayed in which the music image 9097 that cannot be selected in the next circulation order is temporarily displayed in the selection area 9098 (a display that temporarily stops). Finally, scroll display is executed in an effect pattern in which the next selectable music image in the next order after the non-selectable image in the next circulation order is retained in the selected area. For example, when the first music image that is the selectable music image 9096 is displayed in the selection area 9098 and is scrolled to the right, the music image is moved at the second speed V2 in the high-speed scroll mode. The sixth music image, the fifth music image, and the fourth music image, which are non-selectable music images 9097 in the next circulation order, are displayed in a skipped manner while being displayed in the selection area 9098, and finally selected. The scroll display is executed in an effect pattern in which the third music image, which is the possible music image 9096, is retained and displayed in the selected area. The non-selectable music image 9097 is displayed once in the selection area 9098, so that the player's interest in the production can be increased. In addition, since the music corresponding to the unselectable music image 9097 cannot be selected, it is not left displayed, so that the player can misunderstand that the music can be selected.

  Data for displaying the music image shown in FIG. 62 (A), data relating to the circulation order of the music image shown in FIG. 62 (B), scroll speed setting data shown in FIG. 62 (C), and FIG. 62 (D). Each of the scroll mode setting data and the scroll mode effect pattern data shown in FIG. 62 (E) is stored in the effect control ROM, and when the scroll display is executed on the music selection screen, the scroll display is displayed. Used for various settings.

[Music selection process]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a music selection process executed by the effect control CPU 90201. By executing the music selection process described below, the music to be played can be played by the player's operation at a specific timing such as when a customer waiting demonstration display (abbreviation for demonstration display) or at the start of a big hit gaming state. Selectable. This makes it possible to select and determine the music to be played during the game according to the player's intention (preference).

  When the music selection process is executed during the customer-waiting demonstration display, the music that has been selected and played is played back during the variation display of the effect design. When the music selection process is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state, the music selected and determined is reproduced, for example, during the big hit gaming state. Below, the example which performs a music selection process at the time of the start of a jackpot game state is demonstrated.

  As described above, in the state where the music selection setting item (not shown) is selected and determined on the main menu screen and the music selection screen shown in FIG. According to the operation of the stick controller and the operation of the push button, the selection of the music to be played during the game can be determined.

  Specifically, in the state where the music selection screen is displayed, the displayed music image is scrolled in the left direction or the right direction based on the player tilting the stick controller leftward or rightward. Thus, a selection switching operation for switching music images staying and displayed in the selection area 9098 is possible. Further, in response to a push operation on the push button, a determination operation for determining a music to be played during the game as a music corresponding to the music image staying in the selection area 9098 is possible.

  When the music selection process is executed at the time of the customer waiting demonstration display, it is executed for a predetermined period during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration display in the effect control process. Further, when the music selection process is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state, it is executed over a predetermined period during execution of the customer waiting demonstration display in the effect control process. Note that the music selection process may be executed not only at the time of the customer waiting demonstration display and at the start of the big hit gaming state, but also at other timings such as at the start of the probability change state or at the start of the short time state.

In the following, an example in which the music selection process is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state will be described.
In the music selection process, the effect control CPU 90201 first determines whether or not the music selection flag is set in order to check whether or not the music selection screen is being displayed (S90720). . The music selection flag is a flag for determining whether or not the music selection screen (FIG. 62A) is displayed, and when the music selection setting item is selected and determined on the main menu screen. This is set in a main menu display process that is executed separately from the music selection process, and is reset in S90730 to be described later. For example, the effect control CPU 90201 determines that the music selection screen is displayed if the music selection flag is set, and determines that the music selection screen is not displayed if it is not set.

  When the music selection flag is not set (S90720; No), the effect control CPU 90201 ends the music selection process. On the other hand, when the music selection flag is set (S90720; Yes), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not a selection switching operation has been performed by the stick controller (S90721). Specifically, in S90721, the presence / absence of the selection switching operation is determined based on the detection signal from the sensor.

  When there is no selection switching operation (S90721; No), the effect control CPU 90201 executes processing of S90727 described later. On the other hand, when there is a selection switching operation (S90721; Yes), the production control CPU 90201 determines the next order of the circulation order of the music images in the scroll display (left scroll display or right scroll display) according to the selection switching operation. It is determined whether or not the music image 9096 can be selected (S90722).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 62A, when the music image staying displayed in the selection area 9098 is the first music image and the stick controller is tilted once in the right direction, the scrolling display to the left is displayed. It is determined whether or not the second music image in the circulation order next to the first music image is the selectable music image 9096. As shown in FIG. 62B, when the second music image is a selectable music image 9096 (S90722; Yes), the process of S90725 described later is executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), when the music image staying displayed in the selection area 9098 is the first music image and the stick controller is tilted once in the right direction, a right scroll display is performed. It is determined whether or not the sixth music image in the circulation order next to the first music image is the selectable music image 9096. As shown in FIG. 62B, when the sixth music image is a non-selectable music image 9097 (S90722; No), the processing of S90723 described later is executed.

  If it is determined in S90722 that the next order is not the selectable music image 9096, the first selectable music image 9096 after the next order in the cyclic order of the music images in scroll display (left scroll display or right scroll display). Is determined as the next staying display image (S90723). Then, scroll display for moving the next staying display image determined in S90723 to the selection area 9098 in the direction in which the selection switching operation is performed is executed in the high speed mode (S90724).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 62A, when the music image staying displayed in the selection area 9098 is the first music image and the stick controller is tilted once in the right direction, the scrolling display to the left is displayed. As shown in FIG. 62B, the music image in the next cyclic order of the first music image is the sixth music image as the non-selectable music image 9097. In this case, since the first selectable music image 9096 after the next order of the sixth music image is the third music image, the third music image is determined as the next staying display image (S90723). Then, scroll display for moving the third music image to the selection area 9098 in the right direction is executed in the high speed mode (S90724). As a result, right-direction scroll display in the high-speed mode is executed, and in the selection area 9098, these music images are displayed in the order of the sixth music image, the fifth music image, and the fourth music image, and the skip display is displayed. Finally, the third music image is retained and displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S90722 that the next order is the selectable music image 9096, the music image in the next order in the circulation order of the music images in scroll display (left scroll display or right scroll display) is displayed next time. The image is determined (S90725). Then, the scroll display for moving the next stay display image determined in S90725 to the selection area 9098 in the direction in which the selection switching operation is performed is executed in the low speed mode (S90726).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 62A, when the music image staying displayed in the selection area 9098 is the first music image and the stick controller is tilted once in the left direction, the scrolling display in the left direction is displayed. As shown in FIG. 62B, the music image in the next cyclic order of the first music image is the second music image as the selectable music image 9096. In this case, the second music image that is the selectable music image 9096 in the next order of the first music image is determined as the next staying display image (S90725). Then, the scroll display for moving the next stay display image determined in S90725 to the left to the selection area 9098 is executed in the low speed mode (S90726). As a result, right-direction scroll display in the low speed mode is executed, and the second music image is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098.

  After execution of S90724, after execution of S90726, or when it is determined that there is no selection switching operation in S90721, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not there is a determination operation for determining the selected music piece (S90727). Specifically, in S90727, the presence / absence of the determination operation by the push button is determined based on the detection signal from the sensor.

  When there is no determination operation (S90727; No), the production control CPU 90201 ends the music selection process. On the other hand, when there is a determination operation (S90727; Yes), the effect control CPU 90201 determines the music that is staying displayed in the selection area 9098 to be played during the game (the music that is played during the big hit gaming state). (S90728). For example, when the determination operation is performed in a state where the first music image is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098, the music to be played during the game is determined as the first music corresponding to the first music image.

  The effect control CPU 90201 determines the music that is staying in the selection area 9098 to be played during the game (the music that is played during the big hit gaming state) (S90728), and then returns to the main menu screen from the music selection screen. Display is made (S90729). Then, the music selection flag is reset (S90730), and the music selection process is terminated. As described above, when the music to be played during the game is determined on the music selection screen, the display of the music selection screen is terminated and the main menu screen is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the music selection flag is not reset until the determination operation is performed, but a predetermined period after the music selection flag is set or after the selection operation is last performed. May be determined as the music corresponding to the music image retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 when the predetermined period has elapsed, the music selection screen may be switched to the menu screen, and the music selection flag may be reset. In addition, the determination operation returns to the menu screen from the music selection screen. However, by providing a “return” button on the music selection screen, selecting the “return” button, and pressing the push button 9031B. The music selection flag may be reset and the menu screen may be returned.

(1) The gaming machine of the above modification is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine 901) that performs a game,
A music playback means (such as CPU 90201 for effect control) capable of playing back music in a specific period (such as a period in a big hit gaming state);
Music selection screen display means capable of displaying a music selection screen (music selection screen of FIG. 62, etc.) capable of selecting a music to be reproduced from a plurality of types of music (reproduction effects of the plurality of types of music of FIG. 62, etc.); Prepared,
The music reproduced in the specific period can be selected from a plurality of types of music (music A to F, etc.)
The music playback means plays back a specific part that is a part of the currently selected music and is different from the head of the music at the time of selecting the music (such as the production control CPU 90201 playing the chorus part).
The music selection screen includes a selectable image (such as selectable music image 9096 in FIG. 62) that can specify selectable music (first music to third music in FIG. 62), and music that cannot be selected yet ( 62 can be displayed together with a non-selectable image (such as the non-selectable music image 9097 of FIG. 62) that can identify the fourth music to the sixth music of FIG. 62 (FIG. 62A, etc.).

According to such a structure, the production effect at the time of music selection can be improved.
(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The effect selection screen displays a part of the non-selectable image as the non-selectable image (for example, a part of the non-selectable music image 9097 indicated by diagonal lines in FIG. 62A is displayed as a gray image). ).

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize that there is an unselectable image, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The production selection screen is
According to the player's action (selection switching operation by left / right operation of the stick controller, etc.), a plurality of the selectable images and the selection impossible in a predetermined order (such as the circulation order of the music images shown in FIG. 62B). An image (such as a music image shown in FIG. 62 (B)) can be scroll-displayed (such as a scroll display shown in the arrow direction in FIG. 62 (A)),
62. In the predetermined display area (selection area 9098 in FIG. 62), the selectable image is retained (display that stays in the selection area 9098 in FIG. 62), thereby specifying the effect to be executed (corresponding to the music to be played back). Specify the music image in the center of the screen)
The effect selection screen display means includes
The image corresponding to the next order (normal order) of the selectable images that are staying displayed in a predetermined display region is the next of the first music that is the selectable image (selectable music image 9096 in FIG. 62A). When the second music image corresponding to the second music in the circulation order is a selectable music image 9096 or the like), the selection corresponding to the next order is performed by scroll display according to one operation by the player. In the low-speed scroll mode (FIG. 62 (E)) in which scroll display is executed and the next selectable music image 9096 is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 by S90725 and S90726 in FIG. Scroll display etc.)
An image corresponding to the next order (reverse order) of the selectable images that are staying displayed in the predetermined display area is the non-selectable image (the sixth of the next circulation order of the first music in FIG. 62A). When the sixth music image corresponding to the music is a non-selectable music image 9097 or the like), the selection in the next order in the predetermined display area is performed by scroll display according to one operation by the player. After the impossible image is once displayed, the selectable image corresponding to the next order of the next non-selectable image in the next order is displayed in the predetermined display area by scroll display regardless of the player's action. The staying display is performed (according to S90723 and S90724 in FIG. 63, the scroll display is executed, the non-selectable music image 9097 is displayed while being displayed once, and finally the next circulation order is displayed. Like the scroll display in the high speed scroll mode (FIG. 62 (E)) staying displaying selectable music image 9096 in descending.), It may be.

  According to such a configuration, the non-selectable image is once displayed in the predetermined display area, so that the player's interest in the production can be increased.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above,
In the effect selection screen, the scroll speed in the scroll display is between the selectable images (such as the first speed V1 in FIG. 62 (B)) and between the non-selectable images (in FIG. 62 (B)). 2 speed V2 etc.) (the scroll speed ratio “V1 <V2” etc. in FIG. 62C) may be used.

  According to such a structure, the interest of a game can be improved because scroll speeds differ.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
In the effect selection screen, the scroll speed in the scroll display is higher between the non-selectable images (speed V2 in FIG. 62B) than between the selectable images (speed V1 in FIG. 62B, etc.). Etc.) may be faster (the scroll speed ratio “V1 <V2”, etc. in FIG. 62C).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the period during which non-selectable images are displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(6) In any of the gaming machines according to (3) to (5) above,
In the effect selection screen, the scroll speed in the scroll display varies depending on the operation period of the player ([example in which the scroll speed varies depending on the operation period of the player)].

  According to such a structure, the interest of a game can be improved because a scroll speed changes with a player's operation | movement period.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of opening patterns of the special variable winning ball device 22 by the small hit of the second special symbol may be provided. For example, a pattern having a large number of short opens and a pattern having a small number of short opens may be provided. Further, the type of symbol displayed as the effect symbol may be varied depending on the type of the open pattern. Specifically, if the opening pattern is advantageous to the player (such as a large number of times of opening), it is stopped with a red symbol combination, and if the opening pattern is disadvantageous to the player (such as the number of times of opening is small), the blue pattern You may make it stop by a symbol combination. Further, if it is an advantageous opening pattern, it is possible to win a small hit with the symbol “4”, and if it is an unfavorable opening pattern, it may be won with a symbol “2”. Note that the opening time may be different from the number of opening times.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a series of premium videos is played even when there is a small-bonus storage between big hits has been described. However, the video streamed may be different depending on whether there is a small hitting hold memory between the big hits and when there is no small hit holding memory between the big hits. Further, the type of premium video may be different depending on the number of small hits between big hits (one or two small hits).

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the first acquired image 90196 when it is controlled to the small hit state during the period from the big hit state to the next big hit state, and the second acquired image 90197 or the second acquired image in other periods. The three acquired images 90198 may be in the same display mode. Further, the first acquired image 90196 and the third acquired image 90198 that are in a state where there is a small hit within the hold may be the same. In addition, the number of acquired images may not be the sum of the number of winnings per unit, but may indicate the total number for each winning in a single opening. The number may be displayed continuously.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, the description related to the change of music as a selection effect that can be selected by the player has been described. However, the effect changed by the selection effect may be other than music. For example, the effect changed by the selection effect may be a background change effect, a video change effect, a character change effect, or the like. In such a case, the effect may be taken over when the one that has been selected once is selected again. Specifically, in a gaming machine that can be reserved to change the background by operating a push button, the user tried to change the background, but when he wanted to keep the current background, the production of the current background It may be continued (for example, music in the current background continues to flow).

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the music selection effect can be executed during the big hit has been described. However, the music selection effect may be executed during the rush or may be executed in the non-KT state. In such a case, a plurality of periods in which the selection effect can be executed are provided, and the music is divided into a period when the number of fluctuations is small (1 to 10 times) and a period when the number of fluctuations is large (70 to 100 times). The selection effect may be executed. The selection effect may be executed during the customer waiting demonstration. For example, a menu screen can be opened by operating a push button during a customer waiting demonstration, and the volume and light intensity of a pachinko machine can be adjusted and the execution frequency of the production can be changed in the menu screen. Good.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60E, the case where the currently executed item is changed to the character “return” has been described. However, instead of changing to characters, the color or shape of the currently executed item may be different.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the music is reproduced from the chorus portion of the music has been described. Depending on the music, it may be played back from a part other than “rust” (A melody etc.), or the part played back by the music may be different.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot period in the jackpot gaming state is a period in which the attacker is repeatedly released, that is, a round gaming period, but is not limited thereto. For example, the jackpot period includes a fanfare effect period that is executed at the start of the jackpot game state, a period in which the attacker opens repeatedly (round game period), and an ending effect period that is executed at the end of the jackpot game state. It is good also as a period. The fanfare effect is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state and notifies that the big hit gaming state has been entered. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state, which is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  (9) In the above-described various music selection controls, medals are inserted, a predetermined number of bets are set, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the stop button is operated by the player. When the symbols on the display means are stopped according to the combination of the symbols when the combination of the symbols to be stopped is a specific symbol combination, it can be applied to a slot machine (slot machine) in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. is there. In the slot machine, music selection and determination operations may be executed by a push button or a cross key provided on the housing.

  (10) In the embodiment described above, the big hit gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variation state), a short time state, and a high base state.

  (11) As this embodiment, a gaming machine that pays out game media to the player's hand in response to the occurrence of a win has been described. You may employ | adopt the enclosure type game machine which adds a game point (score), without paying out at hand. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls, which are examples of game media, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball launching operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and production symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variation display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, a specific value exceeding 0% has been described as a “ratio (ratio, probability)” as a specific example. However, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence ratio of a predetermined game state 1 in a predetermined game period is compared with the occurrence ratio of another game state 2, and “one occurrence ratio is higher than the other occurrence ratio” This includes the case where the percentage of occurrence of one game state is 0%.

  (14) In the embodiment described above, after the variable display result when the display result of the variable display is determined to be the probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability change state is unconditionally entered. An example of controlled probability state control is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation determination device that is controlled to the probability variation state when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the special winning opening in the special variable prize ball device 9020. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

  (15) The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 Pachinko machine 4A First special symbol display 4B Second special symbol display 5 Production display device 120 Production control CPU
400 movable accessory 411 accessory drive motor 901 pachinko gaming machine 909 effect display device 9015 variable winning ball device 9022 special variable winning ball device 90200 effect control microcomputer 90560 game control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing a variable display,
A movable body capable of executing a specific action;
Movable body effect executing means capable of executing a movable body effect for operating the movable body from a first timing of the specific variable display when executing a specific variable display by a specific variable display pattern among a plurality of variable display patterns; ,
Specific production execution means capable of executing a specific production different from the movable body production;
With
The movable body effect executing means can execute the movable body effect from a second timing different from the first timing when the specific effect is being executed in the variable display immediately before the specific variable display. ,
further,
Display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects selectable by the player;
A selection effect means capable of executing a selection effect for selecting any one of the plurality of items;
A corresponding effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the item selected in the selection effect means;
The display means is capable of displaying an item corresponding to the first effect even when the first effect of the plurality of types of effects is being executed in the selection effect.
The corresponding effect execution means is
When an item corresponding to a second effect different from the first effect is selected in a state where the first effect is being executed, the second effect is executed,
In a state where the first effect is being executed, if an item corresponding to the first effect is selected again, the game is executed by taking over the state of the first effect being executed. Machine.